JP6891918B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some such gaming machine, for example, be that exists which is aimed the interest improve player in Rukoto a plurality kinds types per having different number of rounds.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, there was a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a discriminating means that performs a predetermined discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminating result of the discriminating means is a predetermined specific discriminant result. Based on this, the ball-entry means for executing the privilege-game advantageous to the player, the ball-entry means for which a predetermined privilege is given when the game ball enters the ball, and the ball-entry means for the ball-entry means. As the state, the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are set as the ball entry state setting means for setting 1 in the above-mentioned privilege game. , The first effect executing means for executing the first effect during the period in which the state of the ball entering means is set to the second state by the ball entering state setting means, and the execution of the privilege game are completed. , A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the first effect for at least a predetermined period, and firing capable of firing a game ball based on an operation by the player. The second effect is based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition that can be satisfied when the means and the content of the operation for the launching means become a specific operation content is satisfied during the execution of the second effect. The second effect executing means includes a third effect executing means that also executes the third effect of the effect mode different from the above, and the second effect executing means does not satisfy the determination condition at the time when the execution of the privilege game is completed. Also, when the second effect can be executed and the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result during the execution period of the second effect, the first effect is performed until the specific determination result is shown. 2 The production can be continued, and the gaming machine has a first production mode that can suggest to the player that the privilege game is executed as a production mode that can be set during the execution period of the second production. At least a second effect mode that can suggest that the privilege game is less likely to be executed than the first effect mode is provided, and the determination result of the determination means is obtained at least during the execution period of the second effect. When a specific determination result is obtained, the same game as the game suggested by the first effect is suggested as the effect from the start of the privilege game to the setting of the first first state. It is a configuration in which a possible fourth effect can be executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the launching means can launch a gaming ball at a firing speed according to the content of the operation of the player.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a discriminating means that performs a predetermined discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discriminant result. anda benefits game execution means for executing an advantageous benefits game in a ball entrance means a predetermined benefit is provided by the game ball is ball entrance, as the state of the ball entrance means, game ball entering A ball-entry state setting means for setting a first state in which a ball is possible and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state in the above-mentioned privilege game, and a ball-entry state setting means. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect during the period in which the state of the ball entering means is set to the second state, and the second effect for at least a predetermined period when the execution of the privilege game is completed. 1 For a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the effect, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on an operation by the player, and the launching means thereof. A first effect mode different from the second effect, based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition that can be satisfied when the content of the operation becomes a specific operation content is satisfied during the execution of the second effect. The second effect executing means includes a third effect executing means that also executes the three effects, and the second effect executing means performs the second effect even if the determination condition is not satisfied at the time when the execution of the privilege game is completed. It is feasible, and when the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result during the execution period of the second effect, the second effect can be continued until the specific determination result is shown. As an effect mode that can be set during the execution period of the second effect, the gaming machine has a first effect mode that can suggest to the player that the privileged game is to be executed, and a first effect mode thereof. At least a second effect mode capable of suggesting that the privilege game is difficult to be executed is provided, and the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result at least during the execution period of the second effect. In this case, as an effect from the start of the privileged game to the setting of the first first state, a fourth effect capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the first effect is executed. It is a possible configuration.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special selection table for hitting, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special selection table for hitting. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the flow of the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect executed after the end of the jackpot. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the flow of the pseudo-interval effect. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed at the start of a pseudo-interval effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-interval effect at the time of a big hit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed during the special variation end display period of the pseudo interval effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed at the end of the pseudo interval effect. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed during the special variation extension display period of the pseudo interval effect, and (b) is executed when a big hit occurs during the special variation extension display period of the pseudo interval effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal variation selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special variation selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special fluctuation control processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command setting process for display which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control action. It is a flowchart which showed the special variation end command setting process for display which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows the inter-round effect start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing the special game effect end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows the special variation end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the RAM in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the period shortening process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special variation control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state setting table defined in the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the transition of the gaming state of. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the modified example of the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the special selection variation pattern selection table in 4th Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views schematically showing the flow of the pseudo-interval effect in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the payout speed selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command setting process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the payout control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process executed by MPU in the payout control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control processing executed by MPU in the payout control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball lending control processing executed by MPU in the payout control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the modified example of the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram of the RAM in the main control device in the modified example of the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the ball supply setting table in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball supply stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead time setting process executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, "city stage" → " It is changed repeatedly in the order of "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"-> ... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryobako" or "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Be told. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entry port 64, and when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. A lottery for the design) will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are four types of special symbols, "Big hit A", "Big hit B", "Big hit C", and "Big hit D", and the specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the number of times according to the big hit type. To. In addition, after the end of the special gaming state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the player is given a game value (game value) according to these jackpot types.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four types of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit D" are provided.

When it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit D", it becomes a special game state of the number of rounds according to each big hit type. Specifically, "big hit A" is a jackpot (3R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened three times, and "big hit B" is a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It is a jackpot that is opened four times (4R jackpot). In addition, "big hit C" is a big hit (6R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened 6 times, and "big hit D" is a special winning opening (large opening) 65a opened 15 times. It is a big hit (15R big hit) to be done. In each jackpot, the length of the period (interval period) from the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to the opening of the next specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is constant (10). It is configured to be (seconds). In addition, after the end of each big hit, as an added value after the end of the big hit, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit to the end of the lottery of the special symbol eight times. Further, from the end of the big hit to the end of the special symbol lottery 12 times, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol).

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the state shifts to the special game state. It is a state of easy game. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time-saving state" (normal symbol time-saving medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which means that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

After that, the period from the end of the jackpot of the special symbol to the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 12 times, is the period of the special symbol. It is called the probability change period. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the probability change period of the special symbol is shown by using the number of lottery of the special symbol. For example, if the probability variation period of the special symbol is 12 times until the lottery of the special symbol is completed, the probability variation period of the special symbol is described as 12 times. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery eight times, is the time reduction of the normal symbol. Called a period. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the time saving period of the ordinary symbol is shown by using the number of lottery of the special symbol. For example, if the time saving period for the normal symbol is 8 times until the lottery for the special symbol is completed, the time saving period for the normal symbol is described as 8 times.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the time saving period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the time of jackpot according to the type of jackpot. Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the "big hit A" until the lottery of the special symbol is completed three times, and when it becomes "big hit B", the "big hit B" is reached. After the end of the special symbol lottery, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the lottery of the special symbol ends 6 times, and when it becomes "big hit C", the normal symbol continues from the end of the "big hit C" until the lottery of the special symbol ends 8 times. When the time saving state of is continued and becomes "big hit D", the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued from the end of the "big hit D" until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 15 times.

Further, instead of increasing the hit probability of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entry port 64 or the electric accessory is released by hitting the normal symbol once. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol high probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are set, but after the "special symbol high probability state" ends, the "normal symbol time saving state" is reached. May be configured to be. Instead of the number of lottery of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, when the special symbol becomes a big hit, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and also shifts to the "time saving state of the normal symbol". When the state shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol", the state is continued from the end of the jackpot of the special symbol to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 12 times regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, if a new special symbol jackpot is followed between the end of the jackpot and the end of the special symbol lottery 12 times, the process returns to the "low probability state of the special symbol".

If a new special symbol jackpot is reached while the "special symbol high-probability state" is continuing, the "special symbol high-probability state" will be further changed to the special symbol after the new special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until the lottery is completed 12 times. For example, if a special symbol becomes a big hit and shifts to the "special symbol high probability state" and then becomes a new jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the "special symbol high probability state" becomes even more new. It will continue from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is held 12 times. Therefore, in this case, until at least 14 lottery of 2 special symbol lottery held before the new jackpot and 12 special symbol lottery held after the new jackpot is completed. The "high probability state of special symbols" will be continued.

In addition, when the special symbol becomes a jackpot and shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the lottery of the special symbol ends eight times after the jackpot of the special symbol ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, if the jackpot of a new special symbol is not reached by the end of the lottery of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times, the process returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

Then, if a new special symbol jackpot is reached while the "normal symbol time saving state" is being continued, the "normal symbol time saving state" will be further changed to the special symbol after the jackpot of the new special symbol is completed. It will continue until the lottery is completed 8 times. For example, if a special symbol becomes a jackpot and shifts to the "normal symbol time saving state", and then a new jackpot is reached in the fifth special symbol lottery, the "normal symbol time saving state" is further changed to the new jackpot. It will continue from the end until the special symbol lottery is held 8 times. That is, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is reached while the "normal symbol time-saving state" is being continued, the time-saving period ("" The duration of "the time saving state of the normal symbol") is updated.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. It may be set to (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot D) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

In this embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, there is a possibility that all the numbers from "0" to "9" are aligned regardless of the big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect similar to the interval effect (pseudo interval effect) performed during the round during the jackpot in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the jackpot. There is. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type depending on the type of the main symbol displayed when the jackpot is hit.

More specifically, the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of at least eight special symbol lottery is defined as the special variation period, and in this special variation period, the jackpot is being displayed as the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display the same display image as the interval effect of. Further, the sound output from the sound output device 226 and the control of lighting and extinguishing by the lamp display device 227 are the same as the interval effect during the jackpot. As a result, when a new jackpot of a special symbol is made during the probability change of the special symbol, it is difficult for the player to understand that the jackpot has ended once, and it is difficult to understand how long the jackpot will continue. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The display image similar to the interval effect during the jackpot is, for example, a mode in which the main symbol is variablely displayed in a part of the image displayed in the interval effect during the jackpot. This variable display is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish it from the interval effect during the big hit, for example, by reducing the display so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

In the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration, the jackpot type of the jackpot that is won in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot that the player can easily recognize the main symbols aligned by the variable display in the third symbol display device 81) is If the configuration can be determined by the types of the main symbols that are aligned, the player will be able to grasp at least how many rounds the jackpot will continue. That is, for example, if the jackpot this time is known to be "big hit D (15R jackpot)", the player can recognize that the jackpot will continue until at least the 15th round, so that the 15th round of the jackpot simply wins the prize ball. There is a risk that it will be a work for this. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type from the aligned main symbols like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, every time the jackpot round is completed for the player, the next The game can be played with a sense of expectation that the round will start (that is, the jackpot will continue). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the present embodiment, when notifying that a big hit will be made by a variable display (variable pattern effect), all the main symbols are selected regardless of the big hit type, but a specific big hit type is used. A main symbol that is easy to be selected or a main symbol that is difficult to be selected by a specific jackpot type may be provided. For example, in "Big hit D (15R big hit)", it is easy to align the main symbols with the number "7", and in "Big hit A (3R big hit)" and "Big hit B (4R big hit)", "7" The main symbols with numbers may be difficult to align. As a result, when the main symbols with the number "7" are aligned in the variable display, the player is expected to have the "big hit D (15R big hit)" with the largest number of rounds. Can be done. Therefore, in the variable display, it is possible to request the player to align the main symbols with the number "7", so that the player's interest in the variable display (variable pattern production) can be improved. it can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of entry times is up to four times. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 31). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entry ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It can be divided into two types, one for (the period during which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a is composed of a first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability and a first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, respectively. The number of big hit random numbers contained in the table is different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol are the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "7,107,282" are the first for the low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a1. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 30 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is the first random number table for high probability. It is stored in 202a2. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability time and the random number that becomes the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability time. Random numbers that are the jackpots for each are set so that they do not overlap with the numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 16", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot type when the value is "17 to 31" is "big hit B", and the jackpot type when the value is "32 to 94" is "big hit C", and the value is "95". If it is "~ 99", the jackpot type is "big hit D". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front-back deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front-back deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuation time refers to the time from when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is confirmed. For example, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds after the symbol fluctuation of 9.6 seconds is executed and the symbol is confirmed, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). Notated as. Based on this fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) and the special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e, which store a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (See FIG. 9C) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8A).

In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B), for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement normal reach" are shown. Various types of "outside super reach" and various types of "outside special reach" are specified, and various types of "hit normal reach", various types of "hit super reach", and various types of "hit special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for big hits. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). As the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, the fluctuation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is specified.

In the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C), the special variation period in which the above-mentioned pseudo-interval effect is executed (that is, the period from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special symbol is performed eight times). Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern selected in the next jackpot within eight times and the period until the first round of the jackpot starts) is specified. Although the details will be described later, since the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured to select the variation pattern of the variation period determined for each number of lottery of the special symbol. The special fluctuation period can be the same length period (8 seconds) each time. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round is 2 seconds. Therefore, if the next jackpot is reached between the end of the jackpot and the 8th lottery of special symbols, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot is 10 each time. Can be seconds. That is, the period from the pseudo-interval effect to the start of the next round of the jackpot can be matched with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the big hit has ended, and it is difficult to understand how long the big hit will last. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d and the special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e do not necessarily have to specify the period from the start of fluctuation to the determination of the symbol. For example, the period during which the symbol is stopped and displayed may be set to a fixed value (for example, 0.5 seconds), and only the period during which the symbol is fluctuating may be set as the fluctuating period. In addition, the period in which the symbol is fluctuating and the period in which the symbol is stopped and displayed may be specified in separate tables.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9A, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 31) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 is undergoing probabilistic change with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. It has a counter 203e, a time saving medium counter 203f, a special variable changing counter 203g, a look-ahead probability changing counter 203h, and a counter buffer 203i.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol is drawn. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a start prize is won in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize is predicted (estimated).

Then, various predicted information is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prize information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 wins the prize by using the various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as the prize information. It is stored in the information storage area 223a. Further, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the special fluctuation number counter 223e, the above-mentioned pseudo-interval effect is performed eight times. It is determined whether to end with the production or to continue the production more than 8 times. Specifically, during the special fluctuation period (that is, from the end of the jackpot to the time when the lottery of the special symbol is performed eight times), the jackpot does not become a jackpot, and the 9th to 12th special symbols from the end of the jackpot by pre-reading If it is determined in the lottery that it will be a big hit, the pseudo interval effect will be extended until it becomes a big hit. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the production time, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval.

In this way, the main control device 110 predicts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start prize from each counter value acquired according to the start prize (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern). The process of estimating) is mainly performed, and the voice lamp control is performed for complicated processes such as the process of deciding whether or not to extend the pseudo interval effect based on the various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern). This is done by device 113. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the lottery processing in which the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entry into the first ball entry port 64, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 10, is drawn. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used for the voice lamp control device 113, various modes of pseudo-interval effect can be set.

Like the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S605 in FIG. 26). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 27).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S805 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S803: No in FIG. 28).

The probability changing counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in the probabilistic state, and if the value of the probability change counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability change counter 203e is set to zero, and it is the timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed in the final round of the jackpot in the main control device 110 (that is, the end timing of the jackpot). Is determined to be), 12 is set each time. That is, in the case of a big hit of a special symbol, 12 is simply set regardless of the value of the probability change counter 203e. After that, while the value of the probability change counter 203e is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol ends (S216 in FIG. 22).

When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, the value of the probability change counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table 202a2 for high probability, while the special symbol is drawn. If the value of the probability change counter 203e is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a1 for low probability.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set to zero, and it is the timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed in the final round of the jackpot in the main control device 110 (that is, the end timing of the jackpot). Is determined to be), 8 is set each time. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, 8 is simply set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f. After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 22).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 27).

The special fluctuation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not it is the above-mentioned special fluctuation period. When selecting the mode of the variation pattern effect, if the value of the special variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that it is a special variation period (that is, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect). Therefore, the special variation pattern selection table 202e (See FIG. 9C), the mode of the variation pattern effect is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that it is outside the special fluctuation period, so that the mode of variation pattern production is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. Since the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on by operating the RAM erasing switch 122, the power is turned on by operating the RAM erasing switch 122 when the hall is opened or the like. Then, it is started from a normal state (a state in which the mode of the variation pattern effect is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d).

As described above, in the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C), the variation pattern of the variation period determined for each value of the special variation counter 203g (that is, for each number of lottery of special symbols) is selected. Because it is configured to be, the special fluctuation period (the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the eight fluctuation patterns, or until the next jackpot is reached within eight times and the jackpot starts. Period) can be the same period (8 seconds) each time. Therefore, it will be the next big hit from the end of the big hit to the 8 times of lottery of special symbols, and the period until the first round of the big hit starts (8 seconds until the big hit starts and the opening period). (Sum of 2 seconds) and the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the big hit has ended, and it is difficult to understand how long the big hit will last. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo-interval, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning, the pachinko machine 10 uses the special symbol. Whether the winning data should be analyzed as a probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol), or the pachinko machine 10 analyzes the winning data as the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). It is a counter that indicates what to do.

When the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. The look-ahead probability change counter 203h is initialized to zero at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S1014 in FIG. 30), and 12 is set each time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol. (See S612 in FIG. 26). That is, when it is pre-read as a jackpot of a special symbol, 12 is simply newly set regardless of the value of the pre-reading probability change counter 203h. After that, while the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted each time the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is completed (see S614 in FIG. 26).

When the lottery pre-reading in the special symbol is performed, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, the first random number table 202a2 for high probability time, the stop type selection table for high probability time, And each table of the special symbol jackpot type table is compared with the winning data acquired according to the starting winning. On the other hand, if the value of the look-ahead probability change counter 203h is 0, each table of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability, the stop type selection table for low probability, and the special symbol jackpot type table, and the start prize The winning data obtained according to the above is compared.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10.

FIG. 8A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 includes a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a special variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e is provided.

As described above, the first hit random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Further, the first random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (first random number table 202a1 for a low probability) and a high special symbol. There is a table (first random number table 202a2 for high probability) for determining whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol at the time of probability, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each table is different. There is. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. .. As shown in FIG. 8B, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 16, the jackpot this time is "big hit A (3R jackpot)". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 17 to 31, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit B (4R jackpot)". If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 32 to 94, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit C (6R jackpot)", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 95 to 99. If so, the jackpot this time is determined to be "big hit D (15R jackpot)".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9A) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory attached to the first ball opening 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), when the value of the random number counter C3 for the second hit is in the range of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times".

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9B, the selection table 202d1 for selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and the lottery result of the special symbol are hit. At least a hit-and-time selection table 202d2 for selecting a variation pattern when there is a problem is specified.

The special variation selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern in the special variation period (that is, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect). In the special variation selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols are defined. Specifically, the special selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 10 (a)) for selecting the fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and the lottery result of the special symbol are winning. At least the hit-time special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10B) for selecting the fluctuation pattern in the case of the above is specified. The special selection table 202e1 for off-set and the special selection table 202e2 for hit will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special selection table 202e1 for out-of-orders defined in the special variation selection table 202e, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special selection table 202e2 for hitting. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the special selection table 202e1 for off-set defines the number of lottery of special symbols and the mode (variation time) of the selected variation pattern in association with each other. Specifically, if the first or second special symbol lottery performed after the end of the jackpot is missed, the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is not affected by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (Special variation A) is selected. In addition, if the lottery for the special symbol performed for the third or fourth time after the jackpot ends is missed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, if the 5th to 8th special symbol lottery performed after the big hit is missed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To.

That is, if all eight special symbol lottery is missed after the jackpot is finished, it takes a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds x 2 + 1 seconds x 2 + 0.5 seconds x 4) to produce the eight variable patterns. Execute. Further, the end display of the pseudo interval effect is displayed 2 seconds after the end of the eight variation pattern effects. As a result, the effect period of the pseudo-interval effect performed after the end of the jackpot can be fixed to 10 seconds. Therefore, since the effect period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo-interval, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The number of lottery of special symbols is determined based on the value of the special fluctuation counter 203 g. As described above, the special fluctuation counter 203g is set to 8 at the end timing of the jackpot, and is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 8, it is determined that the special symbol lottery this time is the first lottery because the special symbol lottery has not been performed even once after the jackpot ends. .. Further, for example, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 3, it indicates that the special symbol lottery has been executed 5 times after the jackpot ends, so that the special symbol lottery this time is determined to be the 6th lottery. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, the hit-time special selection table 202e2 also defines the number of lottery of special symbols and the mode (variation time) of the selected variation pattern in association with each other. .. Specifically, if the first special symbol lottery performed after the end of the jackpot is a win, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation D) with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. If the second big hit is after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern (special variation E) with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is selected, and if the third big hit is after the big hit, the fluctuation time is 4 seconds. (Special variation F) is selected, and when the jackpot is the fourth time after the jackpot ends, the variation pattern (special variation G) with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Furthermore, if the jackpot hits the fifth time after the jackpot ends, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (special variation A) is selected, and if the jackpot hits the sixth time after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation time is 1. If a 5-second fluctuation pattern (special variation H) is selected and the jackpot hits the 7th time after the jackpot ends, a 1-second fluctuation pattern (special variation B) is selected and the 8th time after the jackpot ends. In the case of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation C) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

Each fluctuation time specified in the special selection table 202e for hit time is configured so that the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the start of the next jackpot is 8 seconds. For example, when the big hit is achieved in the third special symbol lottery after the big hit is completed, the variable time is changed from the special selection table 202e1 for the time of loss as a variable pattern corresponding to the first and second special symbol lottery. A variation pattern of 2 seconds (special variation A) is selected. Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the third special symbol lottery, a variation pattern (special variation F) having a variation time of 4 seconds is selected from the hit-time special selection table 202e2. Therefore, the total of the three fluctuation times is 8 seconds (2 seconds x 2 + 4 seconds).

With this configuration, even if the number of lottery of special symbols within 8 times after the end of the big hit is a big hit, 8 seconds until the next big hit and 2 seconds of the opening period of the big hit (total) A pseudo-interval effect can be performed during (10 seconds). That is, it is possible to make the production period of the pseudo-interval effect the same regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won during the special fluctuation period, so it is difficult to understand whether or not the jackpot will continue as a result of the pseudo-interval effect. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to have the player confirm the pseudo-interval effect to the end while expecting that the jackpot will continue after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the pseudo-interval production.

Also, even if the number of lottery of special symbols within 8 times after the jackpot ends is a jackpot, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot are the same period ( 10 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the big hit has ended, and it is difficult to understand how long the big hit will last. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out one prize ball at a time. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out in a predetermined time (10 seconds) by the payout motor 216. Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). As a result, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls, for example, during a big hit, the payout motor 216 keeps paying out the prize balls without rest, and the payout motor 216 is prevented from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing due to melting of the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion touched by the player such as the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout suspension period until the payout of the prize balls is stopped by the payout motor 216 are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216. Further, for example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker or the like (not shown)) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation pattern effect (a variation pattern effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, at least the variation pattern table 222a and the special variation pattern table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The variation pattern table 222a and the special variation pattern table 222b are referred to in order to select a detailed aspect of the variation pattern effect based on the mode of the rough variation pattern effect notified by the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. Table. The variation pattern table 222a is referred to when selecting the mode of the variation pattern effect to be performed after the ninth time (that is, after the end of the pseudo interval effect) after the jackpot is completed. On the other hand, the special variation pattern table 222b is referred to when selecting the mode of the variation pattern effect performed within 8 times (that is, within the execution period of the pseudo interval effect) after the jackpot ends. As described above, the variable pattern effect performed in the pseudo interval effect refers to, for example, a mode in which the main symbol is reduced and displayed in a variable manner so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, when the jackpot of the special symbol is hit again after the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make the player feel as if the special gaming state has continued since the previous jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d. Is provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special variation period ends, the winning information storage area 223a is referred to, and a big hit is obtained from the end of the special variation period until the special symbol lottery is executed four times. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that there is a big hit, the pseudo interval effect is extended until the big hit is started. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the production time, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 36). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, the flow of the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect executed in the special fluctuation period after the jackpot ends will be described. FIG. 12 shows a case where it is suggested that the jackpot has ended in the pseudo-interval effect executed after the "big hit D (15R jackpot)" ends (that is, the lottery results of eight special symbols after the end of the jackpot are all missed. It is a figure which showed (when was).

The upper figure of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a transition of the effect executed before and after the big hit and a transition of the state of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in comparison with each other. As shown in FIG. 12, when the symbol stopped and displayed after the symbol variation due to the variation pattern effect is the symbol corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is started. When the jackpot starts, a 2-second opening effect is executed. In this opening production, a production in which a new jackpot is won is celebrated. For example, the boy normally displayed in the sub-display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) is displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81, and congratulates the player with "Congratulations". It is a production to be described.

When this opening effect is completed, the first round effect is started. In each round of the jackpot, the player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls (game value) than usual, so in the round production, an effect suggesting that the prize balls (game value) are obtained is executed. For example, a boy who is normally displayed in the sub-display area Ds2 (see Fig. 4 (b)) enters a treasure room filled with gold and silver treasures, acquires a large amount of treasure, and is overjoyed. And so on. Further, when the first round is started, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). To. By winning a ball into the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the player can obtain a larger amount of winning balls (game value) than usual.

After that, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (for example, 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have won) is satisfied, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed and the interval effect is produced. Is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, but this interval effect continues for 10 seconds, and an effect of notifying whether or not the next round is started is performed depending on whether or not the door is opened. .. This door is, for example, the door of the next treasure room. Then, when the door is opened and the start of the next round is notified, the second round effect is started and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened. In the second round production, as in the first round, the player can get a prize ball, for example, a boy enters the treasure room through the door and gets a lot of treasure and is overjoyed. A production that suggests is performed.

Then, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (for example, 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have won) is satisfied, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened as in the first round. As soon as it is closed, an interval effect is executed. As described above, this interval effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the next round is started depending on whether or not the door is opened.

Then, even after the third round, the round effect and the interval effect are alternately executed in conjunction with the open / closed state of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

It should be noted that the round effect does not necessarily have to be the same in each round. For example, in even-numbered rounds, a boy plays a treasure room to win a large amount of treasure (first round), and in odd-numbered rounds, a girl (not shown) relaxes at a resort beach (second round). ) May be executed. Further, for example, the above two types of effects may be configured to be randomly selected in each round. In addition, an effect that can be selected only in rounds other than the final round of the jackpot may be provided. For example, in rounds other than the final round, the above-mentioned second round effect is configured to be selected with a lower probability than in the first round effect, and in the final round of the jackpot, only the first round effect is selected. It may be configured to be possible. With this configuration, the second round effect is displayed, so that the player can be made aware that one or more jackpot rounds remain. That is, only by displaying the second round effect, it is possible to recognize that the opportunity to obtain a large number of prize balls is given at least once. Therefore, by executing the second round effect, the second round effect is executed. It can give a great sense of satisfaction to the player.

In addition, in the 15th round, which is the final round of "Big hit D (15R big hit)", the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (for example, 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won) is satisfied. , When the jackpot is finished, the pseudo interval effect is executed. In this pseudo-interval effect, the same effect as the above-mentioned interval effect (that is, an effect in which a boy opens the door) is executed 8 seconds after the effect is started. After that (that is, 8 to 10 seconds after the start of the pseudo-interval effect), basically, an effect that succeeds in opening the door or an effect that fails to open the door is executed. Although the details will be described later, when the variable pattern effect of the special symbol is executed during the pseudo interval effect, the main symbol is reduced in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the player). Executes the fluctuation pattern production (in a manner that is difficult to notice when

The control during the pseudo-interval effect will be described in detail with reference to the lower diagram of FIG. As shown at the bottom of FIG. 12, a special fluctuation period is set after the jackpot ends. In this special variation period, as described above, the mode of variation pattern production is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C). In the example of FIG. 12, since the lottery of the special symbols eight times after the end of the jackpot is all missed, the mode of the eight fluctuation pattern production is all the special selection table 202e1 for the time of the miss (see FIG. 10 (a)). Is selected from. That is, in the fluctuation pattern production performed for the first time and the second time after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (design fluctuation 1.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected. In the fluctuation pattern production performed for the third and fourth times after the jackpot ends, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation B) with a fluctuation time of 1 second (symbol fluctuation 0.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected. In the variation pattern production performed from the 5th to the 8th after the jackpot ends, a variation pattern (special variation C) with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (symbol variation 0.1 seconds + confirmation display 0.4 seconds) is selected. To.

That is, after the jackpot is completed, eight fluctuation pattern effects are executed over a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds x 2 + 1 seconds x 2 + 0.5 seconds x 4). As a result, the period (special variation period) for executing the variation pattern effect eight times after the jackpot is completed can be fixed to 8 seconds. Therefore, since the execution period of the pseudo-interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo-interval, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, after all eight fluctuation pattern effects are completed, a 2-second end effect for ending the pseudo interval effect is executed. Specifically, the player is informed that the next round is not started (that is, the previous round was the final round of the jackpot) by executing the above-mentioned effect of failing to open the door. Suggest. When this end effect is executed, if the variation pattern effect is executed in a reduced manner in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, it is reduced and executed after the end effect is completed. The variable pattern effect that was used is returned to the normal display size. That is, the variation pattern effect is executed by returning to the mode illustrated in FIG. 4 (b). As described above, after the special variation period has elapsed (that is, the lottery of the 9th and subsequent special symbols after the end of the jackpot), the variation pattern effect is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. Further, the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a mode of effecting the variation pattern for 5 to 30 seconds. Therefore, the variation pattern effect that is executed after the special variation period ends has a longer variation time than the end effect (2 seconds). In this case, if the executed variation pattern effect is left in a reduced mode even though the end effect has elapsed, most of the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where nothing is displayed. In some cases, the player may mistakenly think that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem. Therefore, after the pseudo-interval effect is completed, the display mode of the variable pattern effect is configured to return to the normal size, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a case where a big hit is made again after the pseudo interval effect will be described. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a case where a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot is completed, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a case where the jackpot is the third special symbol after the jackpot is completed. FIG. 13 (c) is a diagram showing a case where a big hit is obtained in the lottery, and FIG. 13 (c) is a diagram showing a case where a big hit is obtained in the twelfth special symbol lottery after the big hit is completed.

As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery after the big hit is completed, the fluctuation time is shown from the hit special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10 (b)). An 8-second variation pattern effect is selected. As a result, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot can be set to 8 seconds. In addition, a period of 2 seconds (opening period) is provided from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot (the period of the pseudo-interval effect) and the execution period of the interval effect (10 seconds) executed during the jackpot are matched. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo-interval, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the big hit is obtained in the third special symbol lottery after the big hit is completed, the mode of the variation pattern effect executed in the first and second times is selected from the special selection table 202e1 for the time of loss. .. Further, the mode of the variation pattern effect to be executed for the third time is selected from the special selection table 202e2 for hitting. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13B, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern effect to be executed for the first time and the second time after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot ends. Since the fluctuation pattern production with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern production to be executed for the third time, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot should be 8 seconds. Can be done. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot (the period of the pseudo-interval effect) and the execution period of the interval effect (10 seconds) executed during the jackpot are matched. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo-interval, the player can be made to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, if it is determined by pre-reading that all eight special symbol lottery will be missed after the jackpot ends, and at the end of the special fluctuation period, it will be the fourth jackpot after the end of the special fluctuation period. All the modes of the variation pattern effect during the special variation period are selected from the special selection table 202e1 for out-of-order. As a result, in the fluctuation pattern production performed for the first time and the second time after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (special variation A) is selected, and is performed for the third and fourth times after the end of the jackpot. In the fluctuation pattern production, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second (special fluctuation B) is selected, and in the fluctuation pattern production performed 5 to 8 times after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (special variation B) is selected. Variable C) is selected. That is, after the jackpot is completed, eight fluctuation pattern effects are executed over a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds x 2 + 1 seconds x 2 + 0.5 seconds x 4).

In addition, the mode of the variation pattern effect executed from the first to the third time after the end of the special variation period is selected from the selection table 202d1 for off-set, and the variation pattern effect executed the fourth time after the end of the special variation period. The embodiment is selected from the hit selection table 202d2. In this case, even after the special fluctuation period ends, the pseudo-interval effect is extended until the next big hit. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled so that the pseudo interval effect is continued over 12 fluctuation pattern effects after the jackpot is completed. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the production time, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval. The period of the interval effect and the period of the pseudo interval effect are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily set, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

In the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234. Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 40) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 40). Since it is desirable that these images are displayed immediately after the power is turned on, they are composed of simple display images having a smaller amount of data than the image data displayed at normal times.

When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, the rest to be stored in the resident video RAM 235. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the “○” symbol when the power is turned on and the fluctuation image of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol when the power is turned on are alternately and repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , Interval effect, pseudo interval effect, and demo effect are provided in the display data table.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. , The jackpot C, or the jackpot D, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The interval effect is an effect executed between the end of each jackpot round and the start of the next round. As described above, the pseudo interval effect is an effect executed after the end of the jackpot, and the same effect as the interval effect is executed. If the start condition is satisfied during this pseudo interval effect, the variable effect is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the screen.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the interval effect, the pseudo interval effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are defined according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 15) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .. Therefore, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 16). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning that is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 16).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 16 in the example of FIG. 16). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", the address "0002H" in the transfer data table defines the Bull data, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 40) (see S2005 in FIG. 40). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 51 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 42B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 42B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 42B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 42 (b) see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 51 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing the image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 42 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 17) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 42 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 52). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 52). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 42B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, an example of the pseudo interval effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. In the following description, a pseudo interval effect executed after the "big hit A (3R big hit)" is completed will be described as an example. FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed at the start of the pseudo interval effect. As shown in FIG. 18A, a horizontally long rectangular area is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of rounds digested before the pseudo interval effect is started is displayed inside the area. It is configured to be. In this example, since the pseudo interval effect is executed after the jackpot (big hit A) with 3 rounds, the characters "ROUND3" are displayed in the rectangular area. In addition, a boy appears at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect of finding the door displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the pseudo-interval effect, a boy tries to open this door.

Further, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, the variation pattern effect is reduced (that is, displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to see). The difference between the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the pseudo interval effect and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the interval effect executed during the jackpot is the variation pattern effect. Is displayed in a reduced size. That is, since the interval effect is performed during the jackpot, no special symbol lottery is performed and the variable pattern effect is not executed, so that nothing is displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, except that the variable pattern effect is reduced and displayed, the same display image is displayed for the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect, and the variable pattern effect is reduced to the extent that it is difficult to see. .. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect.

The method of making it difficult to visually recognize the variable pattern effect is not limited to this. For example, during the pseudo interval effect, the variation pattern effect may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner to make it difficult to see. Further, the pseudo fluctuation pattern effect may be reduced and displayed on the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 not only during the pseudo interval effect but also during the jackpot interval effect. Further, when the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed on the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, the reduced display portion may be configured to be always hidden by an electric accessory or the like. Further, the electric accessory may be configured to operate only during the jackpot interval effect and the pseudo interval effect, and to hide the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. These can make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern effect is simply reduced and displayed in the lower right portion, but it may be configured to be displayed in a different manner. For example, during the pseudo-interval effect, the main symbol may be displayed with a symbol other than a number, so that the mode may be different. As a result, even if the player notices that the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed during the special variation period, it is difficult to understand whether the result of the variation pattern effect is a hit or a miss. That is, it is difficult to tell whether the jackpot will start again or not until the result of the pseudo-interval effect is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to observe the result of the pseudo-interval effect with interest.

Further, during the special fluctuation period, the stop display period may be configured to be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). This makes it difficult for the player to see the result of the variation pattern effect, even if the player notices that the variation pattern effect is reduced during the special variation period, and the player constantly during the special variation period. You can make it feel as if the design has been reduced and continues to fluctuate. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the result of the fluctuation pattern effect executed during the special fluctuation period is a hit or a miss. Therefore, until the result of the pseudo-interval effect is confirmed, it is difficult to understand whether the jackpot will be started again or not. Therefore, it is possible for the player to observe the result of the pseudo-interval effect with interest.

On the other hand, it may be configured so that the period of the symbol change is extremely short (for example, 0.1 second) so that the player is difficult to recognize that the symbol is changing. This makes it possible to recognize that what is displayed in the lower right part is just a list of meaningless numbers, and whether the result of the fluctuation pattern production executed during the special fluctuation period is a hit or a miss. It can be confusing. Further, when the period of the symbol change is shortened, the fake effect may be displayed during the stop display period. For example, the stop symbol may be displayed for a moment, and the fake symbol may be changed for the remaining time. Further, the design may be configured to be transparent during the stop display. With these, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the result of the fluctuation pattern effect executed during the special variation period is a hit or a miss, so until the result of the pseudo interval effect is confirmed, will the jackpot be started again? , It can be difficult to understand whether it will be a big hit. Therefore, it is possible for the player to observe the result of the pseudo-interval effect with interest.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. If the special symbol is a big hit during the special fluctuation period, as shown in Fig. 18 (b), the door that the boy was trying to open is opened in the pseudo interval effect, and "+1 ROUND" is displayed from inside the door. Is performed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a new round of jackpots will be started, and the player can be pleased. The effect of opening this door is executed during the period from the start of the next jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot. When the jackpot is hit again via the pseudo interval effect, the number of rounds is displayed from the continuation of the final round of the jackpot that ended last time. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 18 (b) (when the jackpot is hit again in the special fluctuation period after the "big hit A (3 round jackpot)" is completed), after the display of "+1 ROUND" appears, "4ROUND" is displayed. After that, as the number of rounds increases, the display of the area for displaying the number of rounds provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81 also increases by one.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not a big hit in the special fluctuation period, the boy will be shown in FIG. 19A in the special fluctuation end display period (see FIG. 12) after the end of the special fluctuation period. The door cannot be opened and the production of crying is performed. Further, after the effect of the boy crying, as shown in FIG. 19B, a woman appears on the third symbol display device 81, and an effect of displaying the characters "See you again!" Is executed. To. By displaying in this way, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot has ended. The effect during the special fluctuation period is the same as when a big hit occurs during the special change period, and only the effect executed after the end of the special variation period (that is, the effect of notifying the result of the pseudo interval effect) is the big hit. It is configured to be executed in a different manner depending on whether or not it becomes. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the 8-second effect executed during the special fluctuation period regardless of whether or not the jackpot is achieved during the special fluctuation period. Therefore, the character of the display control device 114 can be used. The capacity of ROM 234 can be reduced.

In addition, if the special symbol is not a big hit during the special fluctuation period and it is determined by pre-reading that the special symbol will be a big hit by lottery within 4 times, the effect of the boy crying in FIG. 19 (a). After, the effect shown in FIG. 20 (b) is executed. That is, a rectangular area appears at the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "Open the door by repeatedly pressing the button!" Are displayed. Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of the hand pressing the frame button 22 is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that there is a chance that the jackpot will continue, and the player can participate in the production by pressing the frame button 22.

The effect of prompting the pressing of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) continues until the variable pattern effect, which is a big hit, is executed. Then, the effect of opening the door (see FIG. 18B) is executed in 2 seconds before the end of the variable pattern effect which is a big hit. Furthermore, in the period from the big hit to the start of the first round (opening period), a woman appears as shown in Fig. 20 (b), and the characters "I did it" are displayed. The production is performed. With this effect, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot continues.

It should be noted that the effects performed in the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect are not limited to the effect of opening the door, and suggest that the jackpot will continue (or that the jackpot has ended once and has become a new jackpot). The mode of the effect may be arbitrarily determined as long as the effect to be performed and the effect suggesting that the jackpot ends are provided. For example, a ally of justice performs a production that fights against the enemy, suggesting that the jackpot will continue (or the jackpot has ended once and became a new jackpot) by the production that wins the enemy, and the enemy It may be configured to suggest that the jackpot ends by defeating.

Further, the effect of prompting the pressing of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) does not necessarily have to be executed after the effect of the boy crying is executed. After the effect that the boy starts crying, another effect may be executed, and then an effect that prompts the pressing of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) may be executed. For example, a boy may perform an effect of discovering another door, and then an effect of urging the frame button 22 to be pressed (see FIG. 20A). Further, in this case, the time until the next big hit is determined by pre-reading, and the timing for starting the execution of the effect of prompting the pressing of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) is determined in advance. You may. As a result, the execution period of the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the pressing of the frame button 22 can be set to the same period each time. Therefore, when it takes a long time to hit the jackpot, the effect of prompting the player to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) is continuously displayed for a long time, and the player is prevented from getting tired of pressing the frame button. It is possible to execute the effect for a period appropriate for executing the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the pressing of the frame button 22.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is not obtained during the special fluctuation period, the mode of the fluctuation pattern production after the ninth time after the end of the jackpot is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. It is not limited to this. For example, in the 9th to 12th special symbol lottery (that is, the remaining period of the high probability state of the special symbol after the special fluctuation period ends), the mode (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern production is obtained from different data tables. It may be configured to be selected. For example, if the result of the 9th special symbol lottery is out of order, the variation pattern effect for 2 seconds may be selected without fail. As a result, when notifying the end of the jackpot as a result of the pseudo interval effect, the end notification effect (see FIGS. 19A and 19B) is produced for 2 seconds, and the ninth variation pattern effect is produced. Can be matched with the fluctuation time of. That is, the end timing of the effect of notifying the end of the jackpot (see FIGS. 19A and 19B) can be matched with the end timing of the ninth variation pattern effect. Therefore, until the 9th variation pattern effect, the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and in the 10th and subsequent variation pattern effects, the variation pattern effect is displayed in the normal manner from the start of the effect. Since the variable pattern effect may be executed, it is not necessary to cancel the reduced display during the variable pattern effect. Therefore, the display control can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball that becomes a big hit by pre-reading at the end of the special fluctuation period, an effect of urging the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20A) is executed. , Not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit during a special fluctuation period, an effect of urging a button to be pressed using the big hit opening period (see FIG. 20A) is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). It may be configured. Specifically, at the start of the opening effect, the effect shown in FIG. 19 (a) in which the boy starts crying is executed, and then the effect of urging the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20 (a)) is performed during the opening period. It may be configured to execute with the remaining time. Further, in the jackpot that executes the effect of urging the button to be pressed during the opening period (see FIG. 20A), the opening period is set longer than 2 seconds (for example, 10 seconds), and the effect of urging the button to be pressed is set. (See FIG. 20A) may be displayed longer. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the jackpot will continue if the button is pressed, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further increased.

Further, even when there is no reserved ball to be a big hit, it may be configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the button to be pressed with a certain probability (for example, 5%). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to know whether or not the jackpot will continue just by the appearance of the effect that prompts the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20 (a)). Can be intriguing. Further, even if the result of the effect of prompting the button press (see FIG. 20A) is different, the effect is configured to end at the end of any of the 9th to 12th variation pattern effects. You may. In this case, if it is out of alignment, the effect may be easily completed in accordance with the end of the variation pattern effect a small number of times. That is, the probability of being notified that the result of the effect of prompting the button press (see FIG. 20A) to be pressed at the end of the 9th variation pattern effect is set high, and the 12th variation pattern effect is produced. The probability of being notified of the deviation may be set low at the end of. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the longer the effect of urging the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20A), the higher the expectation that the jackpot will continue. Therefore, since the button can be pressed while hoping that the effect of urging the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20A) continues for a long time, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 33. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 26.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the fluctuation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value is changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 23. When this special symbol change start process is executed, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot of a special symbol, whether it is a jackpot A, a jackpot B, a jackpot C, or a jackpot D according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the red LED is turned on. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on, and when the jackpot D is reached, the red LED, the blue LED, and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (the result of this lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start processing is special. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S212). Then, if the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S212: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S220. Specifically, the setting performed in the process of S213 is to set an opening start command for outputting to the voice lamp control device 113. The opening start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the effect mode to be executed during the opening period of the jackpot, and is set including information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been achieved in the special fluctuation period. That is, in the processing of S213, when the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, when the current is in the special fluctuation period), the opening start command corresponding to the jackpot of the special fluctuation period is set, and the special fluctuation counter is set. When 203g is 0 (that is, when the present is not in the special fluctuation period), the opening start command corresponding to the normal jackpot is set. Based on this opening start command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 opens the door in the pseudo-interval effect to make it appear as if the jackpot state has continued since the previous jackpot (see FIG. 18B). , Or a normal opening effect (for example, a production that congratulates you on winning the jackpot).

The opening start command set in the process of S213 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) to be executed later by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening start command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines from the opening start command whether or not it is a big hit in the special fluctuation period, and displays and controls a display opening start command corresponding to the big hit state. It is transmitted to the device 114 (see S1619 in FIG. 36). Upon receiving the display opening start command, the display control device 114 displays a normal opening (not shown) or an opening for a special fluctuation period (see FIG. 19B) based on the display opening command (see FIG. 19B). See S2420 in FIG. 43).

On the other hand, in the processing of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability changing counter 203e is larger than 0 (S214), and the probability changing counter 203e If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S214: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the probability change counter 203e is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

In the subsequent processing of S216, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is larger than 0 (S216), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is larger than 0 (S216: Yes), the time saving medium counter The value of 203f is subtracted by 1 (S217), and the process shifts to S218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the processing of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S218.

In the processing of S218, it is determined whether or not the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (S218), and if it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (S218: Yes), the special variation The value of the medium counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0 (S218: No), the processing of S219 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S220.

In the process of S220 executed after the process of S213, S218, or S219, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81, which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S211. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop of (S220).

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in.

In the special symbol change start process, first, the lottery result of the special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302). The special variation counter 203g indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special variation state (that is, a state in which the mode of the variation pattern effect is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e when executing the variation pattern effect). It is a counter, and if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special fluctuation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is It indicates that it is a normal state (that is, a state in which the mode of the variation pattern effect is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d when the variation pattern effect is executed).

If it is determined that the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0 in the processing of S302 (S302: No), the normal fluctuation selection processing is executed (S303). Here, the details of the normal variation selection process (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the normal variation selection process (S303). This normal variation selection process is a process for determining the mode of the variation pattern effect to be executed from the variation pattern selection table 202d.

In this normal variation selection process, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S301 is a big hit of the special symbol (S401). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of four types of special symbols (big hit). Among A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 16", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (3R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "17 to 31", it is determined to be a jackpot B. If it is judged to be (4R jackpot), if it is in the range of "32 to 94", it is judged to be jackpot C (6R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "95 to 99", it is judged to be jackpot D (15R jackpot). (See FIG. 8B).

If it is determined in the processing of S401 that it is a big hit of a special symbol (S401: Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301. (S402). In the process of S402, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined based on the hit-time selection table 202d2 (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B).

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. , Jackpot A, Jackpot B, Jackpot C, Jackpot D Shared fluctuation patterns include various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach", and fluctuations for jackpot C and jackpot D Various types of "special reach" are defined as patterns.

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S401: No), the display mode of the outlier is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the stop type, "reach of front and rear detachment", "reach other than front and rear detachment", "complete detachment" and the like are defined.

Next, the deviation pattern is determined based on the deviation selection table 202d1 (S405). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S403, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time. When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is completed, this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation start processing.

Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the special fluctuation selection process is executed (S304). Here, the details of the special variation selection process (S304) will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special variation selection process (S304).

In this special variation selection process, as in the normal variation selection process (S303), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S301 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S501), and the special symbol is selected. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S501: Yes), the jackpot display mode is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S502). The specific content is the same as the setting (S402) of the display mode at the time of a big hit in the normal variation selection process (S303). It is not necessary to be the same as the setting of the jackpot display mode (S402). For example, a table different from the first hit type selection table 202b used in the normal variation selection process (S303) is prepared, and the jackpot variation The mode may be set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the special selection table 202e2 for hit (see FIG. 10B) (S503), and this process is terminated. As described above, the hit-time special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10B) is configured to select a fluctuation pattern of a fixed fluctuation period according to the number of lottery of special symbols. Specifically, if the first special symbol lottery performed after the end of the jackpot is a win, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation D) with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is selected. If the second big hit is after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern (special variation E) with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is selected, and if the third big hit is after the big hit, the fluctuation time is 4 seconds. (Special variation F) is selected, and when the jackpot is the fourth time after the jackpot ends, the variation pattern (special variation G) with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Furthermore, if the jackpot hits the fifth time after the jackpot ends, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (special variation A) is selected, and if the jackpot hits the sixth time after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation time is 1. If a 5-second fluctuation pattern (special variation H) is selected and the jackpot hits the 7th time after the jackpot ends, a 1-second fluctuation pattern (special variation B) is selected and the 8th time after the jackpot ends. In the case of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation C) with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the start of the next jackpot can be fixed regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the effect period of the pseudo interval effect and the effect period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of order (S501: No), the display mode of the out of place is set (S504). The specific content is the same as the setting (S404) of the out-of-order display mode of the normal variation selection process (S303). It should be noted that it does not have to be the same as the setting of the display mode of the deviation (S404). For example, a table different from the table for determining the stop type used in the normal variation selection process (S303) is prepared, and the variation mode of the deviation is prepared. May be set.

Next, the deviation pattern is determined based on the special selection table 202e1 (FIG. 10 (a)) for deviation (S505), and this process is terminated. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. As described above, the special selection table 202e1 for out-of-order (see FIG. 10A) is configured to select a fluctuation pattern of a fixed fluctuation period according to the number of lottery of special symbols. Specifically, if the lottery for the special symbol performed for the first time or the second time after the end of the jackpot is missed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (special fluctuation A) is selected. If the lottery for the special symbol performed for the third or fourth time after the jackpot is completed is missed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery for the special symbols performed from the 5th to the 8th after the jackpot is missed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the end of the special fluctuation period can be made constant (8 seconds) regardless of the number of lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the effect period of the pseudo interval effect and the effect period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time.

Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the processing of S303 or the processing of S304 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S303 or the processing of S304 is set (S305). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or the process of S304 is set (S306). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 31). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S306 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S602). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (8 in this embodiment) (S603).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 8. If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 8 (S603: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S604). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S605).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is acquired (S606), and the look-ahead probability changing counter stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. The value of 203h is confirmed (S607).

Here, when the look-ahead probability changing counter 203h is larger than 0 (S607: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S606 and for high probability. It is determined by comparing the random number values (winning values) of 30 stored in the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) one by one (S608). As described above, as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168" , 176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ", and the value of the random number counter C1 per first and these hits If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

On the other hand, if the value of the look-ahead probability changing counter 203h is 0 (S607: No), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S406 and for low probability. It is determined by comparing the random number values (winning values) of 3 stored in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) one by one. As described above, three random number values of "7,107,282" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number value to be the hit of these are set. If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

After determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot by the processing of S608 or S609, the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609, the first hit type counter C2 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above, and the stop. Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S610). In the process of S610, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is set (S611). The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the jackpot determination result from the winning information command and stores this information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a to determine the special variation extension display. It is used for such purposes.

After setting the winning information command by the process of S611, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S612). If the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is a jackpot of a special symbol (S612: Yes), 12 is set in the look-ahead probability change counter 203h (S613), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is out of the special symbol (S612: No), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead probability change counter 203h is greater than 0 (S614), and the look-ahead probability change is in progress. If the counter 203h is larger than 0 (S614: Yes), the look-ahead probability change counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S615), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the look-ahead probability change counter 203h is 0 (S614: No), the process of S615 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S701). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S708). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is larger than 0 (S708: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is normal. It indicates that the time saving state of the symbol is indicated, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S709). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S709, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 9A).

In the process of S708, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to the process of S711. In the processing of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 9A).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S712: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, if it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is larger than 0 (S714), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is larger than 0 (S714: Yes), the current time is the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entry port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S715, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S714, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to the process of S717. In the processing of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S717), and shift to the process of S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S712: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is larger than 0 (S719), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is larger than 0 (S719: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S719: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is set (S725), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1106) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the first This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is added by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power failure occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1002). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process shifts to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1012 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1115 of FIG. 31, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1004: No). S1007: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1108 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1111 and S1112 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the voice lamp control device issues the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) and the start winning process (see FIG. 26), and the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 26). It is transmitted to 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), the inter-round effect start command, the special game effect end command, and the special variation end command set in the special variation control process (see FIG. 33) are voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot will be set. The setting for the end of this jackpot includes the setting for the start of a special fluctuation period. On the other hand, when the specific winning opening 65a is closed in a round other than the final round, an inter-round production start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a special fluctuation control process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the fluctuation pattern effect (special fluctuation) in the special fluctuation period has ended is executed (S1105). In the special fluctuation control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the special fluctuation set after the end of the jackpot, and if it is the end timing of the special fluctuation, the special fluctuation end command is set. By setting this special variation end command, the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)) is triggered by the end of the special variation executed last in the special variation period. )) Can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the special fluctuation control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1107). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37. To do. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device 37 executes the process. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the normal variation selection process (S303) or the special variation selection process (S304) of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1110). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1110: Yes), the process is shifted to S1101, and each process after S1101 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1110: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1111, S1112).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1112).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1108 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1109, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1113 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1113), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1114). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1115), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1109 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1108, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the jackpot (S1201). Specifically, if the processing of S213 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, the jackpot of the special symbol is started. Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1201, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S1205 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206). It is determined whether or not the closure of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all the rounds of the jackpot have been completed) (S1207).

If it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and the values corresponding to the various counters after the jackpot are set. Set (S1209). That is, by setting 12 in the probability change counter 203e, it is set so that the special symbol is in a high probability state from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special symbol is performed 12 times. Further, by setting 8 in the time saving / medium counter 203f, it is set to be in a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol is executed eight times. Further, by setting 8 in the special fluctuation counter 203g, the special fluctuation period is set from the end of the jackpot to the execution of the special symbol lottery eight times. After setting various counter values, this process ends.

If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), an inter-round effect start command is set (S1210), and this process is terminated. This inter-round effect start command is a command for starting an interval effect (inter-round effect) executed for 10 seconds from the end of the jackpot round to the start of the next round.

The inter-round effect command set by the process of S1210 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the inter-round effect command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the inter-round effect command for display to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round-to-round effect command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the interval effect (inter-round effect).

Next, the special fluctuation control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special fluctuation control process (S1105). This special variation control process (S1105) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines the end timing of the variation pattern effect (special variation) during the special variation period set after the end of the jackpot. , This is a process for starting the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)), which is an effect at the end of the special variation period.

First, in the special fluctuation control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the special fluctuation (S1301). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 selected in the special fluctuation selection process (S304) has elapsed (S1301). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time of this special fluctuation is determined. If it has passed (S1301: Yes), the special variation end command is set (S1302), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special fluctuation has not elapsed (that is, it is not the special fluctuation period or the end timing of the special fluctuation is not in the special fluctuation period) (S1301: No), the processing of S1302 is skipped. , End this process.

The special variation end command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special fluctuation end command, it determines whether or not the special fluctuation period has ended, and when it determines that the special fluctuation period has ended, the voice lamp control device 113 issues a display special fluctuation end command. Send to 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display special variation end command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 19), which is an effect at the end of the special variation. 20 (a)) is started. Here, the display special variation end command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes a special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or a special variation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)). Contains information that indicates which one to display.

In the present embodiment, in the special fluctuation control process (S1105), a special variation end command is output every time the variation pattern effect (special variation) executed in the special variation period after the end of the jackpot ends. The special variation end command may be set only at the end timing of the final variation pattern effect of the variation period. As a result, the process of outputting the special variation end command at the end of the special variation other than the special variation executed last in the special variation period can be omitted, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1516 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 of FIG. 35), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1516. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1516 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1516. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1517, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 35). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1408 is performed via the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1409, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached via the processing of S1404 to S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1501 was executed (S1501), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variation display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1507 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510), and the process proceeds to the process of S1511. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1511, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the processing of S1512 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1517), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to the process of S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1511), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the display variation pattern command setting process for extracting and setting the variation pattern type from the variation pattern command is executed (S1602), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602).

In the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602), first, the variation start flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1701). After that, a variation pattern is acquired from the received command (S1702), and it is determined whether or not the acquired variation pattern is a special variation (S1703). Then, when it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is not a special fluctuation (S1703: No), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the ROM 222 (S1704). On the other hand, when the acquired variation pattern is a special variation (S1703: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the special variation pattern table 222b of the ROM 222 (S1705). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1603). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). Further, in the process of S1607, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1607 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the starting winning prize Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S1607 to the special symbol reserved ball counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1607 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1606, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1606: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1608). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1608: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1609), and the main Return to processing. In the process of S1609, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the value of each counter C1 is acquired by the main control device 110, and the acquired counter C1 and the look-ahead probability change. A jackpot lottery for a special symbol is performed according to the value of the middle counter 203h, and the jackpot determination result is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the look-ahead probability change counter 203h is larger than 0, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and if the look-ahead probability change counter 203h is 0, the special symbol for low probability is drawn. A jackpot lottery of special symbols is performed based on the jackpot random number table. Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the jackpot determination result of the special symbol obtained by pre-reading is only a prediction, and may be provided separately from the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S1608, if the winning information command is not received (S1608: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1610). Then, when the round number command is received (S1610: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1611), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1610: Yes). S1612), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1610, if the number of rounds command is not received (S1610: No), then it is determined whether or not the inter-round effect start command is received from the main control device 110 (S1613). Then, when the inter-round effect start command is received (S1613: Yes), a display inter-round effect start command for displaying the interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81 is set ( S1614), this process is terminated. The display round-to-round effect start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display inter-round effect start command, the display control device 114 starts the interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1613, if the inter-round effect start command is not received (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the special game effect end command has been received (S1615). Then, when the special game effect end command is received (S1615: Yes), the display special game effect end command for starting the pseudo interval effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1616). End the process. The display special game effect end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display special game effect end command, the display control device 114 starts the pseudo interval effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1615, if the special game effect end command has not been received (S1615: No), it is determined whether the special variation end command has been received (S1617). Then, when it is determined that the special variation end command has been received (S1617: Yes), the display special variation end command setting process is executed (S1618), and this process is terminated.

Here, the display special variation end command setting process (S1618) will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the display special variation end command setting process (S1618). This display special variation end command process is a process for setting a display special variation end command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the pseudo interval effect end effect based on the end of the special variation period. is there.

In the display special variation end command setting process (S1618), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the special variation period (S1801). Specifically, whether or not the end timing of the special fluctuation period is determined is determined by whether or not the special fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times (8 times in this embodiment). The number of executions of the special variation may be included in the special variation end command and received from the main control device 110, or is determined based on whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the jackpot. It may be something to do.

If it is determined in the process of S1801 that it is not the end timing of the special fluctuation period (S1801: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the special fluctuation period (S1801: Yes), the winning information of the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 is acquired (S1802), and the jackpot is won. It is determined whether or not there is the winning information to be shown (S1803).

In the process of S1803, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating a big hit (S1803: Yes), a special variation extension display (FIG. 20A) is set as a display mode of the end of the special variation (S1804). The process proceeds to S1806. The special variation extension display set here is based on the winning information acquired in the process of S1802, and the special variation extension display is terminated in accordance with the predetermined stop display which is a big hit. Specifically, when the winning information in the first, second and fourth areas is out and the winning information in the third area is a big hit, for example, the fluctuation time of the loss is 10 seconds and the fluctuation time of the jackpot is 15 seconds. As described above, the fluctuation time may be uniquely determined by the jackpot determination result, and the special fluctuation extension display may end in 35 seconds when the predetermined stop display which is the jackpot is displayed, or it is a jackpot. The special variation extension display may be continuously displayed until a variation pattern command for displaying a predetermined stop display is received.

On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a big hit (S1803: No), the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) is set as the display mode of the special variation end (S1805). ), The process proceeds to S1806. The special fluctuation end display is a fixed effect for 2 seconds, and as shown in FIG. 19 (a), after the effect that the boy cannot open the door and starts crying is executed, FIG. 19 (Fig. 19 (a) As shown in b), a woman appears on the third symbol display device 81, and the effect of displaying the characters "See you again!" Is executed. By setting the special fluctuation end display to 2 seconds, the period until the pseudo interval effect ends can be set to 10 seconds (special fluctuation period 8 seconds + special fluctuation end display 2 seconds), so it is a big hit. It can be combined with the production period of the interval production.

It should be noted that the special variation end display is not necessarily limited to the production of 2 seconds, and based on the winning information acquired in the processing of S1802, the fourth stop display is finally displayed in the variation corresponding to the first to fourth areas. The special fluctuation end display may end in accordance with the stop display of the area. Specifically, when the winning information in the 1st to 4th areas is out of order, for example, the fluctuation time of the outlier is 10 seconds, so that the fluctuation time is uniquely determined by the jackpot determination result. , The special fluctuation end display may end in 40 seconds when the stop display is displayed at the end, or until the fluctuation pattern command for displaying the stop display at the end, that is, the fluctuation pattern command after 4 times is received. The special fluctuation end display may be continuously displayed.

In the process of S1806, the display mode of the special variation end set in the process of S1804 or the process of S1805 is set as the special variation end command for display (S1806), and this process is terminated to perform the command determination process (see FIG. 36). ) Return. The display special variation end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display special variation end command, the display control device 114 starts the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)) on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. In the process of S1617, if the special fluctuation end start command is not received (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1617: No). S1619), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to. Specific examples of other commands include the opening start command described above. In the process of S1619, the information on whether or not the jackpot is during the special fluctuation period is extracted from the opening start command, and the command to send the display opening start command corresponding to the extracted information to the display control device 114. Set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variation display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then the display variation pattern command setting process of the command determination process (see FIG. 35) is performed. In (S1602), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910.

In the process of S1909, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910). , End this process. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 53, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 40) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 41, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2102 and S2102, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then, the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 51 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), a simple command determination process is performed so that a simple power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variable image) is drawn. (See S2308 in FIG. 42 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 42 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When it is via the device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a simple variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. .. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (a). FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 42B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. 3 The command determination process (S2302) is executed so that the symbol display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47.

In the display setting process (S2303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the rear image after the change is sent to the image controller 237. Set a transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the above from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined in the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, and other display when the command is off) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a simple power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to shift to the process of S2304. To do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 44A. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table storage area. It is read from 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variable type command (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (b). FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, and other display at the time of deviation) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601). , The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is executed. The stop symbol after the production is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 43).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If there is a display round number command (S2408: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round-to-round effect start command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). ), If there is an inter-round effect start command for display (S2410: Yes), the inter-round effect start command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the inter-round effect start command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the inter-round effect start command processing. This inter-round effect start command process is a process for displaying the interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display inter-round effect start command received from the voice lamp control device 114. ..

In the inter-round effect start command processing, first, an inter-round display data table corresponding to the display mode of the interval effect (inter-round effect) indicated by the inter-round effect start command for display is determined, and the determined inter-round display data table is determined. Is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each round display data table corresponding to the display mode of the inter-round effect, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the inter-round display data table set by the processing of S2801 is turned on. At the same time, the data table determination flag corresponding to the other inter-round display data table is set to off (S2803). In the display setting process, the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to which inter-round effect display mode by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2803. It can be easily determined whether or not there is.

Next, based on the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2805). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2806), the inter-round effect start command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no display round-to-round effect start command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display special game effect end command among the unprocessed commands. (S2412) If there is a display special game effect end command (S2412: Yes), the special game effect end command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the special game effect end command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the special game effect end command processing. This special game effect end command process is a process for displaying the pseudo interval effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display special game effect end command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the special game effect end command processing, first, a special game effect end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation executed at the end of the special game effect indicated by the special game effect end command for display is determined, and the determined special The game effect end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each special game effect end data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation executed at the end of each special game effect, the special game effect end display data table set by the processing of S2901 is performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other special game effect end display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display mode of which special game effect end effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903. It can be easily determined whether it corresponds.

Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initially set to 0. (S2905). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2906), the special game effect end command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display special game effect end command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display special variation end command among the unprocessed commands (S2412: No). S2414) If there is a special variation end command for display (S2414: Yes), the special variation end command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the special variation end command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the special variation end command processing. This special variation end command processing displays the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 20 (a)) corresponding to the display special variation end command received from the voice lamp control device 114. This is a process for displaying at the end of special fluctuation.

In the special change end command processing, first, the special change end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special change end display or the extended display to be executed at the end of the special change indicated by the special change end command for display is determined, and the data table is determined. The determined special variation end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each special variation end data table corresponding to the display mode of the end display or extension display of each special variation end, the special game effect end display data table set by the processing of S3001 is displayed. The corresponding data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other special game effect end display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display mode of which special game effect end effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3003. It can be easily determined whether it corresponds.

Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initially set to 0. (S3005). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3006), the special variation end command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2414, if it is determined that there is no special display change end command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2416). If there is a back image change command (S2416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52), when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the rear image after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. Specify the image type. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3102 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3102, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2416, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2418), and there is an error command. If (S2418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2419) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing (see FIG. 47B), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3202). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S3202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2418 (S2418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2420), and the process returns to the process of S2201. In addition, as the process (S2420) for other unprocessed commands, for example, the process when the above-mentioned display opening start command is received can be mentioned. Specifically, in the process of S2420, when it is determined that the display opening start command has been received, if it is a jackpot in the normal fluctuation period, it is congratulated that the normal opening mode (for example, a new jackpot has been won). The opening effect is displayed in the mode), and if the jackpot is during the special fluctuation period, the opening effect is displayed in a mode as if the jackpot continues (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 19B). Is.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2402 to S2420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display a simple power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. The variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 44 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 44 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are executed. Performs a process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3302), S3303 to S3304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 48. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S3305.

In S3305, the pointer update process is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3503), and if it is a demo display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3503: No). S3506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 48 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is larger than 0 (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3309: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3316, if the demo display flag is on (S3316: No), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, a simple variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, details of the transfer setting process (S2305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3601 (S3601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3702). In the process of S3702, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3703. Further, as a result of the process of S3701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3703.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 42 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 42 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S3601: No in FIG. 51 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3802), and if it is the transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Further, in the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

In the process of S3806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3807. Further, as a result of the processing of S3805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3807.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3810), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to the process of S3813.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3813, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The discrimination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3813 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 17 (S3901). That is, in the processing of S3901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3902 (S3903). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 42B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to perform a pseudo interval effect after the end of the jackpot. In this pseudo-interval effect, the winning jackpot starts during the special fluctuation period (from the end of the jackpot to the end of the eight fluctuation pattern effects, or from the end of the jackpot to the time when the special symbol lottery is performed eight times. It is an effect that is executed during the period until it is done), and the same effect as the interval effect that is executed during each round of the jackpot is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the jackpot is won from the end of the jackpot to the time when the special symbol lottery is performed eight times, the jackpot may be won at any of the first to eighth times. , The period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot is configured to be 10 seconds. In this 10 seconds, the pseudo interval effect is executed, and it is suggested that the jackpot continues. On the other hand, in the interval effect executed during the jackpot, the effect period is fixed at 10 seconds, and it is suggested that the jackpot continues and the next round starts in the 10-second effect. That is, the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the jackpot are configured so that the effect period and the effect content are the same. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, if the effect suggests that the jackpot will continue, the player may have won the jackpot with a large number of rounds, or the jackpot ends once. However, as a result of winning the jackpot again by the time the special symbol lottery is held eight times, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot has continued for a long time. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to know how long the jackpot round will last, it is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation that the jackpot will last for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, pre-reading is performed at the end of the special fluctuation period, and it is determined whether or not there is a lottery result that is a big hit in the lottery of four special symbols from the end of the special fluctuation. ing. Then, when it is determined that the lottery result that is a big hit is on hold, the pseudo interval effect is extended to the big hit. As a result, even if an effect suggesting the end of the jackpot (that is, an effect in which the boy starts crying as shown in FIG. 19A) is displayed in the pseudo interval effect, the pseudo interval period is extended for the player. You can expect that. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing games.

In the present embodiment, the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured so that the special variation period is always 8 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the special fluctuation period is 10 seconds and a big hit occurs during the special fluctuation, the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the first round of the next big hit is 10 by omitting the opening period. It may be seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to match the execution period of the interval effect with the execution period of the pseudo interval effect, the variation pattern effect of the variation time determined according to the value of the special variation counter 203 g is executed. However, the control method for matching the execution period of the pseudo-interval effect with the execution period of the interval effect is not limited to this. For example, when a timer capable of measuring the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot is provided and the mode of the variation pattern effect is selected, the variation period may be set based on the elapsed time. Specifically, for example, when selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern with 5 seconds remaining in the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation time is 5 seconds or less (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds), or the fluctuation is 5 seconds. It may be configured to select one of the times.

Further, the period of the interval effect and the period of the pseudo interval effect are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily determined, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds. In addition, the period of the interval effect during the jackpot may be set randomly each time. As a result, it is not necessary to set the effect period of the pseudo interval effect to a fixed period, so that the table for selecting the variation pattern effect during the special variation period can be shared with, for example, the normal time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the special fluctuation period ends (8 seconds from the end of the jackpot) and the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol ends are matched, but it is not always necessary to match the timing. For example, the special variation period may be set as a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), and the variation pattern effect may be configured to be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d regardless of the fixed period (for example, 8 seconds). That is, even in the middle of the variation pattern production, the special variation period may be terminated when the fixed period (for example, 8 seconds) elapses. With this configuration, the data table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern effect can be shared with the normal time, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Further, by setting the special fluctuation period to a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to know how long the jackpot will last, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time. In this case, if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit during the special fluctuation period and the production period of the fluctuation pattern effect for notifying the big hit exceeds the special fluctuation period, until it becomes a big hit. It may be configured to extend the pseudo interval effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has ended once, so that it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot has continued for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit does not occur in the special fluctuation period, the mode of the fluctuation pattern production is selected from the special selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 10A) for off-set, and in the special fluctuation period. In the case of a big hit, it was configured to select the mode of the variation pattern effect from the special selection table 202e2 for hitting (see FIG. 10B), but the mode of the variation pattern is selected from the common table. It may be configured as follows. For example, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, the mode of the variable pattern effect may be selected from the special selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 10A) for the time of deviation. With this configuration, the special selection table 202e2 for hitting can be omitted, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Further, the special selection table 202e1 for off-set is configured so that the variation pattern effect having a shorter variation period is selected as the number of lottery of special symbols increases. As a result, a relatively long fluctuation pattern effect is executed in the first 4 seconds of the special fluctuation period, so that the special symbol lottery is performed only twice, whereas in the latter 4 seconds, a relatively short fluctuation is performed. Since the pattern effect is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed 6 times. That is, since the number of lottery of special symbols is larger in the latter half of the special fluctuation period, if a big hit is made during the special fluctuation period, it is likely to be a big hit in the latter half of the special fluctuation period. Therefore, in the special fluctuation period, even if the mode of the fluctuation pattern production is selected from the special selection table 202e1 for out-of-order (see FIG. 10A) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, it will be a hit during the special fluctuation period. If so, the possibility of hitting in the latter half of the special fluctuation period can be increased. Therefore, even if it is a hit, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not it is a pseudo-interval effect from the length of the special fluctuation period.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the result of the look-ahead performed at the end of the special fluctuation period is a big hit before the lottery of four special symbols is performed, the pseudo interval effect is extended. Even if there is no reserved ball that becomes a big hit at the end of the special fluctuation period, the pseudo interval effect may be extended with a predetermined probability. As a result, if the pseudo-interval effect is only extended, it is not determined that the jackpot will be a big hit after the end of the pseudo-interval effect, so that the player can see the result of the extended pseudo-interval effect to the end.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern effect of the fixed variation period is selected for each number of lottery of the special symbol in the special variation period. As a result, regardless of whether or not the special fluctuation period is a big hit, the special fluctuation period is configured to end in 8 seconds from the end of the big hit. In other words, in the first embodiment, it is assumed that the variation pattern effect is executed at intervals.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, even in the middle of the special fluctuation period, when a predetermined time (8 seconds) elapses, the main control device 110 gives the voice lamp control device 113 a pseudo interval effect. It is configured to notify that it is the end timing of. That is, even if the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero (non-variable state) in the special fluctuation period, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect can be matched with the interval effect. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly because the variation pattern effect is not executed eight times.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the player is in a non-variable state and the player has stopped the game during the special fluctuation period, the predetermined time (8 seconds) has not elapsed. However, the end of the pseudo-interval effect is configured to be notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first ball entrance 64 before the end of the special fluctuation period. Therefore, for example, the game is stopped because the player who has stopped the game can launch the game ball for the reason of concentrating on the production of whether or not the jackpot continues. The state can be shortened.

In addition, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose money unless the game during the jackpot is continued without taking a break. After a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls were awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if this is not the case, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a will be closed, and the opportunity to win the prize ball will be missed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to know earlier that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the player hits the ball, so that the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform a sharp game.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 203 is changed in the main controller 110 and the timer executed by the MPU 201. The partial processing included in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and the partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 is described. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the RAM 203 built in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a time counting counter 203j, a stop period counter 203k, and a special changing flag 203l. ..

The timekeeping counter 203j is a down counter used for determining whether or not 8 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot. In the jackpot control process 2, the timekeeping counter 203j is set with a counter value corresponding to 8 seconds at the end of the jackpot (see S1221 in FIG. 59), and the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment is executed. Each time it is performed, it is subtracted by 1 in the special fluctuation control process 2 (see S1311 in FIG. 60).

The stop period counter 203k is a down counter that determines the length of the period during which the player has stopped the game in the special fluctuation period set after the jackpot ends. Based on the value of the stop period counter 203k, it is determined whether or not to end the pseudo interval effect earlier than usual. In the jackpot control process 2, the stop period counter 203k is set with a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds at the end of the jackpot (see S1221 in FIG. 59). Further, even when the operation of the handle 51 by the player is detected in the special fluctuation period (that is, when it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is turned on), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is reset. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not changing during the special fluctuation period, the holding ball is in the state of 0, and the handle 51 is not operated by the player, the timer allocation in the second embodiment is performed. Each time the interrupt process (see FIG. 55) is executed, it is subtracted by 1 in the period shortening process (see S4004 in FIG. 57).

The special fluctuation flag 203l is a flag indicating whether or not the special fluctuation period is in progress. If the state is on, it indicates that the special fluctuation period is in progress, and if it is off, the normal state (that is, special) is indicated. (After the end of the variable period). This special variation flag 203l is set to on at the end of the jackpot (see S1222 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, when the special change end command to be output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 is set, the special change in progress flag 203l is set to off (see S4007 in FIG. 57 and S1313 in FIG. 60). If the jackpot of the special symbol is won, it is set to off before the jackpot starts (see S232 in FIG. 56).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 to 60. First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds.

Of the timer interrupt processes, the processes S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 are the same as the processes S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Then, in the timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S111). This special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) is similar to the special symbol variation processing (S104) in the first embodiment, that is, the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S111), S201 to S220, the same processing as the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed.
Then, in the special symbol variation process 2 in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), then the period shortening process is performed. Is executed (S231) to end this process. This period shortening process (S231) is a process for shortening and ending the pseudo interval effect according to the operation status of the handle 51 in the special fluctuation period.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 2 in the second embodiment, when the start of the jackpot is set by the processing of S213, then the special variation during flag 203l is set to off (S232), and the processing shifts to S220. By temporarily turning off the special fluctuation flag 203l before the jackpot starts, it is possible to prevent the production and control during the special fluctuation period from being erroneously executed during the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the period shortening process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this period shortening process. As described above, the period shortening process is a process for shortening and ending the pseudo interval effect according to the operation status of the handle 51 in the special variation period.

In the period shortening process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 203j is larger than 0, thereby determining whether or not it is within 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot (S4001). Then, when it is determined that the value of the timekeeping counter 203j is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S4001: No), the end of the pseudo interval effect has already been notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Since this means that, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4001 that the value of the timekeeping counter 203j is larger than 0, it is then determined whether or not the player is operating the handle 51 based on the detection result of the touch sensor 51a ( S4002). In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the player is operating the handle 51 (S4002: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the value of the stop period counter 203k (S4003), and this process is performed. To finish. The stop period counter 203k is decremented by 1 every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000 ms) is 1000.

On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the player is not operating the handle 51 (S4002: No), the value of the stop period counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S4004), and the stop period counter 203k after the subtraction is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S4005). Then, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203k is not 0 (that is, it is a value of 1 or more) (S4005: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4005, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter is 0 (S4005: Yes), the player has not operated the handle 51 for 2 seconds (that is, the player has not operated the handle 51). Since it means that the ball has not been launched for 2 seconds), in order to shorten the pseudo-interval effect and end it, set the special fluctuation end command (S4006) and set the special fluctuation in-progress flag 203l to off (S4007). ), End this process.

By shortening and ending the pseudo-interval effect, the player recognizes that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first ball entrance 64, before the special fluctuation period ends. Can be made to. Therefore, for example, the game is stopped because the player who has stopped the game can launch the game ball for the reason of concentrating on the production of whether or not the jackpot continues. The state can be shortened.

In addition, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose money unless the game during the jackpot is continued without taking a break. After a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls were awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if this is not the case, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a will be closed, and the opportunity to win the prize ball will be missed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to know earlier that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the player hits the ball, so that the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform a sharp game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process. As described above, this main process is a process of executing the main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

Of the main processes (see FIG. 58), in each of the processes S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116, S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Then, in the main process in the second embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (S1121) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1104) in the first embodiment, and further, instead of the special variation control process (S1105), The special fluctuation control process 2 (S1122) is executed. Details of these processes will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 that follow.

First, the jackpot control process 2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2. Similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 sets the opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a during the jackpot, and starts a new round. This is a process of setting a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the jackpot control processes 2 of S1201 to S1210, the same processes as those of S1201 to S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 2 in the second embodiment, the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and 12, 8 and 8 are set for the probability change counter 203e, the time reduction counter 203f, and the special fluctuation counter 203g, respectively (S1208). S1209) Next, a counter value corresponding to 8 seconds is set in the time counting counter 203j, and a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the stop period counter 203k (S1221). Here, since the timekeeping counter 203j is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 58) (that is, every 4 ms), the counter value corresponding to 8 seconds (that is, 8000 ms) is 2000. .. Further, as described above, since the stop period counter 203k is a counter that is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55) executed every 2 ms, it is a counter corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000 ms). The value is 1000. When the setting of each counter is completed by the process of S1221, the special fluctuation flag is set to ON (S1222), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the special fluctuation control process 2 (S1122) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special fluctuation control process 2. The special fluctuation control process 2 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the pseudo-interval effect based on the value of the time counter 203j, and if it is the end timing, the special variation end command for ending the pseudo-interval effect. It is a process to set.

In the special fluctuation control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the special variation flag 203l is on (S1311), and when it is determined that the special variation flag 203l is off (S1311), it has already been determined. Since it means that the end of the pseudo interval effect has been set, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, when it is determined that the special fluctuation flag 203l is on (S1311: Yes), then the value of the timekeeping counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S1312).

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 203j after subtraction is 0 (S1313), and if it is determined that the value is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1313: No). ), It means that the timing for setting the end of the pseudo-interval effect has not been reached (that is, within 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot), so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the timekeeping counter b203j is 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that it is the timing to set the end of the pseudo interval effect (that is, 8 seconds have passed from the end of the jackpot). Therefore, the special variation end command is set (S1302), the special variation in progress flag 203l is set to off (S1314), and this process is terminated. In this way, by configuring the special fluctuation end command to be set when 8 seconds have passed from the end of the jackpot, the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero during the special fluctuation period. Even if the state (non-variable state) is reached, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect can be matched with the interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly because the variation pattern effect is not executed eight times. The special variation end command set by the process of S1302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201. Inside, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special variation end command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display special variation end command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display special variation end command, the effect of ending the pseudo interval effect is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured so that the time elapsed time from the end of the jackpot can be counted by the time counting counter 203j. Here, when the fluctuation pattern effect is executed without an interval during the special variation, the special variation period ends 8 seconds after the end of the jackpot, and the pseudo interval effect can be ended. If is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero (non-variable state), the end condition of the special variable period is not satisfied, so that the pseudo-interval effect may continue endlessly. It was.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even in the middle of the special fluctuation period, when it is determined by the count value of the time counter 203j that a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed, the pseudo interval effect is terminated. It is configured to be set. With this configuration, even if the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero (non-variable state) during the special fluctuation period, the end of the pseudo interval effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly because the end condition of the special fluctuation period is not satisfied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the player is in a non-variable state and the player has stopped the game during the special fluctuation period, the predetermined time (8 seconds) has not elapsed. However, the end of the pseudo-interval effect is configured to be notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first ball entrance 64, before the end of the special variation period. Therefore, for example, the game is stopped because the player who has stopped the game can launch the game ball for the reason of concentrating on the production of whether or not the jackpot continues. The state can be shortened.

In addition, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose money unless the game during the jackpot is continued without taking a break. After a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls were awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if this is not the case, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a will be closed, and the opportunity to win the prize ball will be missed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to know earlier that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the player hits the ball, so that the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform a sharp game.

In the present embodiment, the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot is counted by the time counting counter 203j provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter means is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the elapsed time is measured by the voice lamp control device 113, and when it is determined that a predetermined period (8 seconds) has elapsed, a pseudo interval effect is produced. May be configured to terminate. As a result, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that it is possible to reliably execute a process of high importance in the game, such as a process of executing a lottery of special symbols. Further, in this case, the variation pattern effect in the special variation period may be configured to be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d as in the normal case. If a fluctuation pattern command indicating a jackpot is output from the main control device 110 before the predetermined period elapses, the voice lamp control device 113 at least performs a pseudo-interval effect until the jackpot variation pattern effect is completed. May be configured to extend. As a result, the special variation pattern selection table 202e can be omitted, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the start condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls becomes zero (non-variable state) in the special fluctuation period, the end display of the pseudo interval effect is set. However, it is possible to display a completely different effect. For example, the effect of urging the player to take a break may be executed. Further, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display prompting the player to operate the handle 51 before shortening and ending the pseudo interval effect. The display prompting the operation is, for example, a display suggesting that the pseudo interval effect ends if no operation is performed. As a result, when the player wants to thoroughly enjoy the production and has stopped the operation, the production can be confirmed to the end by restarting the operation. In addition, if the player continues the game without taking a break due to a long continuous jackpot and pseudo-interval effect, the effect is interrupted and the player recognizes that it is time to take a break. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the pseudo interval effect is terminated when the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero (non-variable state) for 2 seconds during the special fluctuation period. However, the condition for ending the production is not limited to this, and may be a period longer than 2 seconds or a shorter period. In addition, pre-reading is performed at the end of the jackpot, and if there is no lottery result that will be a jackpot in the reserved balls (or if the number of reserved balls is 0), the end display (or a break for the player) is performed at the end of the jackpot. It may be configured to perform an effect of a mode that encourages. With this configuration, the jackpot round is over, and the player can take a break at the timing when a paragraph is reached.

In addition, when the start condition is not satisfied during the special fluctuation period or at the end of the jackpot and the number of reserved balls becomes zero (non-variable state), the end display (or to the player) It may be configured so that the player can select whether or not to perform an effect (such as an effect that encourages a break). For example, when a predetermined operation such as operating the frame button 22 during the jackpot is performed, the effect of urging the player to take a break or the like can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who has just taken a sufficient break from feeling annoyed because the effect of urging the player to take a break again at short time intervals is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the end of the pseudo-interval effect is set when a maximum of 8 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot. However, even if the pseudo-interval effect is completed, a predetermined number of times (8 times) The mode (variation time) of the variation pattern effect is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e until the variation pattern effect of is executed. In this case, it may be configured to execute an effect different from the normal time until the variation pattern effect of 8 times (or 12 times when the high probability state of the special symbol ends) is completed. An effect different from the normal time is, for example, an effect of searching for a door different from the door that could not be opened in the pseudo interval effect. Further, while the effect different from the normal time is being executed, the variable pattern effect may be reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 as in the pseudo interval effect. Good. With this configuration, it is shorter than the normal time such as 1 second or 0.5 seconds (that is, the state in which the fluctuation pattern effect of the fluctuation time of 5 to 30 seconds is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the variation pattern effect is continuously executed by the entire third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot has ended once, but the player can expect to win the jackpot again (that is, the special symbol is in a high probability state).

In the present embodiment, the timekeeping counter 203j is updated every 4 ms in the special fluctuation control process 2 (S1122) of the main process (see FIG. 58), but it is executed every 2 ms. It may be configured to be performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55). As a result, the timekeeping counter 203j can be updated in a finer time width.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the stop period counter 203k is configured to be updated in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55), but is configured to be performed in the main process (see FIG. 58). You may. The value of the stop period counter 203k is used to determine whether or not to shorten and end the pseudo interval effect, and even if the determination to shorten and end is delayed by several ms, the normal pseudo interval is used. This is because the production only continues and no disadvantage occurs.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 71. In the first embodiment described above, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. As a result, in each round of the jackpot, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the ball in the specific winning opening 65a, so that the ball can easily enter the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved balls during the jackpot, so that it is less likely that the number of reserved balls does not exist and the fluctuation does not occur in the special fluctuation period set after the end of the jackpot. That is, it is difficult for the pseudo-interval effect to continue endlessly because the end condition of the special fluctuation period is not satisfied.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, two types of ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64 and second ball entry port 640) are provided, and one ball entry port (second ball entry port 640) is provided. Is provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. Further, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is configured to be easily opened during the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to win a prize in the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, so that the number of reserved balls does not exist in the special fluctuation period set after the jackpot ends. , It is possible to make the situation where the fluctuation does not occur less likely to occur.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that in the game board 13, the electric machine attached to the second ball entry port 640 and the second ball entry port 640 The point that the accessory 640a is provided, the point that the contents of the first type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 are partially changed in the main control device 110, the point that the state setting table 202f is newly added, and the RAM 203 The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a1, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2, and the state transition counter 203m are provided. The partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 31) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the lottery of the special symbol performed based on entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the lottery of the special symbol 1 (special figure 1) (special figure 1), and the second ball entrance The lottery of the special symbol performed based on the entry into the 640 is referred to as the lottery of the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2).

First, the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 13 of the third embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in the lower right portion of the front view. A second entry port 640 is provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640, and by hitting a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a rotates about a direction perpendicular to the game board 13. , The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize at the second entrance.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the second entry port 640 is provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) is provided during the jackpot. ) A ball launched aiming at 65a can easily enter the second entrance 640. Further, during the jackpot, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is easily opened, so that the number of reserved balls tends to be the maximum (4) at the end of the jackpot.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. 62A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62A, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment defines a state setting table 202f in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment. The state setting table 202f is a data table referred to for setting the state after the end of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the settings such as after the end of the jackpot differ depending on the jackpot type. In the state setting table 202f, set values are defined in association with the states to be set.

Further, FIG. 62B is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, instead of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a1 and A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2 is provided. Each of these has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area).

In the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a1, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. , The area where each value is stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second entry port 640. This is the area where each value is stored.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, instead of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 Is provided. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to 4 times, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters (starts) the second entry port 640. The number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning) is up to four times. It is a counter to count.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a state transition counter 203m in place of the time saving medium counter 203f provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. The state transition counter 203m is a counter indicating whether or not the normal symbol is in the low probability state, and if the value of the state transition counter 203m is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Indicates that there is. On the other hand, if the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set in a normal state and a part of the jackpot (big hit E) is reached, a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that the low probability state of the normal symbol (100 times) is set. The state transition counter 203m is used to count whether or not the predetermined number of times has elapsed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the first type selection table 202b of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, a "big hit E" that does not shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol or the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is added. As shown in FIG. 63, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 8", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot type when the value is "9 to 16" is "big hit B", and the jackpot type when the value is "17 to 47" is "big hit C", and the value is "48". The jackpot type when the value is ", 49" is "big hit D", and the jackpot type when the value is "50 to 99" is "big hit E". That is, in the case of a big hit, half are configured to be "big hit E".

As described above, when it becomes "big hit E", it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot and also shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol. Is low. That is, it is a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player as compared with other jackpot types. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls is likely to be maximized during the jackpot by setting the jackpot to a high probability state of the normal symbol. Further, in the game rules, the state of the normal symbol in the so-called normal state (the state of shifting when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10) and the normal symbol state in the jackpot match. Since it is stipulated that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment needs to be used, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a high probability state of the normal symbol even in the normal state. For this reason, unless a "big hit E" that shifts to the low probability state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit is provided, the normal symbol will always be in the high probability state during the game, giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. There is a risk that it will end up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the "big hit E" that shifts to the low probability state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit is provided, it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

Next, the state setting table 202f defined in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64A is a diagram showing the contents specified in the state setting table 202f.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the normal state is set as the state of the pachinko machine 10 or the jackpot is set, the special symbol is set to the low probability state and the normal symbol is set to the high probability state. Set. Here, the case of setting the normal state is, for example, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, or after the low probability state of the normal symbol is set a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends, it is special. This is the case when the number of lottery of symbols reaches a predetermined number of times. Further, even at the start of the jackpot, the special symbol is set to the low probability state and the normal symbol is set to the high probability state, so that the number of reserved balls is likely to be maximized during the jackpot.

Further, after the end of the jackpots A to D, the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. The high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the special symbol is drawn 12 times, after which the low-probability state of the special symbol is set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol is in a high probability state in the normal state, the state of the normal symbol is set to the same state as the normal state after the end of the jackpots A to D. That is, the state of the normal symbol is the same as during the jackpot. Therefore, even if you pay attention to the state of the normal symbol, there is no change between during the jackpot and after the end of the jackpots A to D. It can be more difficult. The high probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol after the jackpots A to D are completed continues at least until the next jackpot.

On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot E, the low probability state of the special symbol is set and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The low-probability state of the special symbol continues at least until the next big hit. In addition, the low probability state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times. After the special symbol lottery has been performed 100 times, the normal state is set. That is, a high probability state of a normal symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64 (b), the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the present embodiment is configured to switch between three types of states. Specifically, it is a normal state, a probabilistic state, and a low probable state. As described above, the normal state is a state in which the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The probabilistic state is a high-probability state of a special symbol, and is a state set when any of the jackpots A to D is completed. Further, the low probability state refers to a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol, and is a state set when the jackpot E ends.

In addition, the characters "right-handed navigation" or "left-handed navigation" written in parentheses on the right side of each state name indicate the direction in which the player is suggested to launch the ball in each state. ing. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This navigation is configured to display directions that are advantageous to the player in each state.

First, in the normal state, a right-handed navigation system, that is, a display recommending that the game ball be launched on the right side of the board is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, a suggestion display is performed so as to launch the ball aiming at the second entry port 640 provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the game board 13. In the normal state, it is a high probability state of the normal symbol, and it is easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to launch the ball aiming at the second entrance 640. .. This normal state continues until one of the jackpots is reached.

In the normal state, if any of the jackpots A to D is reached, the probabilistic state is entered after the jackpot ends. Even in this probabilistic state, the right-handed navigation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This probabilistic state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot or the jackpot E is won. If the lottery of the special symbol is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the normal state, and if the jackpot E is won, the state shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot ends.

In the low probability state, which shifts when the jackpot E is won in the normal state or the probability change state, a left-handed navigation system, that is, a display recommending that the game ball be launched to the right side of the board is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. That is, a suggestion display is performed so as to launch the ball aiming at the first entry port 64 provided in the lower center of the game board 13. This is because, in the low probability state, the first ball opening 64 is easier to win the ball than the second ball opening 640. This low probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or one of the jackpots A to D is won. If the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the normal state is entered, and if any of the jackpots A to D is won, the probabilistic state is entered.

Although not shown, the right-handed navigation system is displayed in each round of big hits. In the present embodiment, since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided on the right side of the front view on the game board 13, the ball must be launched to the right to move the ball to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. This is because it is difficult to win a prize.

Further, as described above, since the normal state is set during the jackpot, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640 is easily opened, the ball launched toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It becomes easier to win a prize in the second entrance located directly above. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls becomes 4, which is the maximum value, by the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, if there is a lottery result that is a big hit in the reserved ball, there is a 50% probability that it will be a "big hit E" (see FIG. 63). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect from being repeated for a long time, and it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being caused to the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds.

Of the timer interrupt processes, the processes S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 are the same as the processes S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Then, in the timer interrupt process in the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process 3 is replaced with the special symbol variation process (S104), the start winning process (S105), and the normal symbol variation process (S106) in the first embodiment. (S121), the start winning process 2 (S122), and the normal symbol variation process 2 (S123) are executed.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 3 (S121) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S121). The special symbol variation processing 3 (S121) is similar to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, that is, the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol variation processing 3 (S121). This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed by the symbol display device 81.

Of the special symbol variation processing 3, in each of the processes S201, S202, S209 to S215, and S218 to S220, S201, S202, S209 to S215, and S201, S202, S209 to S215 in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S218 to S220 is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation processing 3 in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 (second input). The number of holdings N2) of the variable display in the special symbol based on the winning of the ball mouth 640 is acquired (S221). Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 0 (S222), and it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is larger than 0. (S222: Yes) subtracts 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S223), and indicates the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 after the subtraction. The hold ball number command is set (S225). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203c2 from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S225, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225), and the special symbol change start process is performed (S208). End the process. The method of shifting the data is the same as the process of S207 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203c2 is 0 (S222: No), then the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c1 (first). The number of holdings N1) of the variable display in the special symbol based on the winning of the entrance 64 is acquired (S225).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 acquired by the processing of S225 is larger than 0 (S226), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is determined. If it is 0 (S226: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203c2 is larger than 1 (S226: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c1 is subtracted by 1. S227), a hold ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c1 after subtraction is set (S228). The hold ball number command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201 as the hold ball number command set by the process of S224. In the external output process (S1101) (see FIG. 69), the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c1 from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S228, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted (S229), and the special symbol variation start process is performed (S208). End the process. The method of shifting the data is the same as the process of S207 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above.

As described above, in the special symbol variation processing 3 of the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are managed separately, and the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are prioritized at the start of the fluctuation. It is configured to be subtracted. This is because the lottery for the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 3 in the present embodiment, it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203e is 0 (S214: No), or that the value of the probability change counter 203e is larger than 0 (). S214: Yes), the process is configured to shift to S230 when the value of the probability change counter 203e is subtracted by 1. In this process of S230, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S230).

When it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 in the processing of S230 (S230: Yes), the value of the state transition counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S231), and the processing is shifted to S218. On the other hand, in the processing of S230, if it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S230: No), the processing of S231 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S218. To do. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is the low probability state of the normal symbol based on the value of the state transition counter 203m.

Next, the above-mentioned start winning process 2 (S122) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S122). The start winning process 2 (S122) determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, and when there is a starting winning, the value indicated by various random number counters. This is a process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the pending process of

Of the start winning process 2, in the process of S601, the same process as the process of S601 in the start winning process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the start winning process 2 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 (in the special symbol 1). Acquires the number of holdings N1) of the variable display (S621). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (that is, 4) (S622).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is 4. If it is determined that the value is not less than (that is, 4) (S603: No), the process proceeds to S626. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S622: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203c1 is added by 1 (S623). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S624).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c1 from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S624, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S625).

When the value of the random number counter C1 per first is acquired by the processing of S625, when it is determined by the processing of S601 that there is no winning in the first entry slot 64 (S601: No), or the first entry If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if the ball mouth 64 is won, then (S603: No), the ball is then It is determined whether or not a prize has been won in the second entrance 640 (S626).

In the process of S626, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entry port 640 (S626: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 (the number of pending numbers N2 of the variation display in the special symbol 2) is set. Acquire (S627). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (that is, 4) (S628).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S626: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is 4. If it is determined that the value is not less than (that is, 4) (S628: No), the process proceeds to S632. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S626: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S628: Yes), the special symbol 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203c2 is added by 1 (S629). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S630).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203c2 from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S630, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S631).

When the value of the random number counter C1 per first is acquired by the processing of S631, when it is determined by the processing of S626 that there is no winning in the second entrance 640 (S626: No), or the second input If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if the ball mouth 640 is won, the look-ahead process is executed in (S628: No). Then (S632), this process is terminated. This look-ahead process (S632) is a process for determining in advance the lottery result of the special symbol from each counter value acquired based on the start winning prize. This look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 68 that follows.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading process (S632) described above. In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has newly won a prize in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. Then, when it is determined that neither the first entry port 64 nor the second entry port 640 has a new prize (S4101: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if there is a new prize in either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S4101: Yes), each process of S4102 to S4110 is executed. In each of the processes S4102 to S4110, the same processes as those of S607 to S615 of the start winning process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the number of reserved balls is managed separately according to the type of the entry slot into which the ball has entered, and the look-ahead is executed for the start winning prize to any entry slot. It is configured to do.

Next, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (S123) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 2 (S123). The normal symbol variation processing 2 (S123) is similar to the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, that is, the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball slot 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory associated with the above.

Of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S123), in each of the processes S701 to S707, S712, S713, S718, and S722 to S725, S701 to S707 in the ordinary symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S712, S713, S718, and S722-S725, and the same processes are executed. Then, in the normal symbol variation processing 2 in the third embodiment, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired in the processing of S707 (S707), then , Whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 1 (that is, whether or not it is a low-probability state of a normal symbol) is determined (S731).

In the processing of S731, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S731: Yes), it indicates that the current state is a low probability state of the normal symbol, so that the second acquired in the processing of S707. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for low probability, the lottery result of the normal symbol is acquired (S732). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 9A).

On the other hand, in the processing of S731, when the value of the state transition counter 203m is determined to be 0 (S731: No), it indicates that the current state is a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S733). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 9A). After the processing of S732 or the processing of S733 is completed, the processing shifts to S712.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to reset the value of the state transition counter 203m (that is, clear 0) when setting the start of the jackpot of the special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the value of the state transition counter 203m is determined to be 0, so during the jackpot, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. To. That is, during the big hit, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is easily opened, it is possible to easily make the ball win the second ball entry port 640 during the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the number of reserved balls to reach the maximum value (that is, four) by the end of the jackpot.

By the processing of S712, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (S712: Yes), and when the display mode at the time of hit is set by the processing of S713 (S713), then whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0. (S734). When it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S734: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of the normal symbol, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640a The opening period of is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S735), and the process proceeds to S737. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (S734: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, so that it is attached to the second entrance 640. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S736), and the process proceeds to S737.

As described above, 0 is set in the value of the state transition counter 203m during the jackpot, so if a normal symbol hits during the jackpot, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640a The opening period of is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2. Therefore, since it is easy for a ball to win a prize at the second entry port 640 during the big hit, the number of reserved balls can be easily reached the maximum value (that is, four) by the end of the big hit.

In the process of S737, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S737). Then, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S737: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30. Set to seconds (S738) and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (that is, the normal symbol is in the high probability state) (S737: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3. Set to seconds (S739) and end this process.

As described above, since the value of the state transition counter 203m is set to 0 during the jackpot, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is changed during the jackpot, the normal symbol is in the low probability state. A comparatively short fluctuation period (3 seconds) is selected. Therefore, since the number of times the normal symbol fluctuates during the jackpot can be increased, the number of times the normal symbol hits during the jackpot can also be increased. Therefore, since it is easy for a ball to win a prize at the second entry port 640 during the big hit, the number of reserved balls can be easily reached the maximum value (that is, four) by the end of the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main process. As described above, this main process is a process of executing the main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

Of the main processes (see FIG. 70), the processes S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 are the same as the processes S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Then, in the main process in the third embodiment, the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1104) in the first embodiment. The details of the jackpot control process 3 will be described with reference to the following FIG. 71.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3. Similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the jackpot control process 3 sets the opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a during the jackpot, and starts a new round. This is a process of setting a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the jackpot control processes 3 of S1201 to S1208 and S1210, the same processes as those of S1201 to S1208 and S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed. To. Then, in the jackpot control process 3 in the third embodiment, when the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), then the set value corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set based on the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64A). Read and set (S1231), and end this process. Since the setting value according to the state is specified in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64 (a)), in this S1231, the state to be set is simply set in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64 (a)). It suffices to perform a simple process of selecting the setting value corresponding to. Therefore, for example, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of executing a program that calculates a set value according to a state. Therefore, the state after the end of the big hit can be set without delay.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, of the two types of entry ports (first entry opening 64 and second entry opening 640), the second entry opening 640 is the specific winning opening. (Large opening) It is configured to be provided directly above 65a. Then, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is easily opened (that is, the normal symbol is in a high probability state). With this configuration, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 can be easily opened during a jackpot in which the state of the normal symbol needs to be the same as the normal state. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to win a prize in the second entrance 640 during the jackpot, so that the number of reserved balls does not exist in the special fluctuation period set after the jackpot ends. , It is possible to make it difficult for a situation where fluctuations are not made to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly without ending the special fluctuation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, when the pseudo interval effect is configured to end in a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect is executed eight times, the non-variation state (variation pattern effect is not executed). In addition, the more likely it is that a reserved ball does not exist), the less the number of lottery of special symbols executed during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again after the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball easily wins the second entrance 640 during the big hit, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is likely to be maximized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state from becoming non-variable during the pseudo-interval effect, and it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a big hit again after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution of "big hit E" (that is, the big hit that shifts to a disadvantageous state for the player after the end of the big hit as compared with other big hit types) was a big hit. Although it is set to 50% of the cases, it is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, if it is determined that the ball output rate will be too high if the distribution of "big hit E" is 50%, the ratio of "big hit E" can be set to, for example, 60% or 70%. It may be configured to increase the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the person. On the contrary, when it is judged that the ball output rate becomes too low, the ratio of "big hit E" is set to, for example, 40% or 30% to reduce the big hit which is disadvantageous to the player. May be good.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same jackpot type is selected if the value of the first hit type counter value CS1 in the case of a jackpot is the same regardless of the type of the winning slot where the ball wins. However, it may be configured so that a different jackpot type is selected according to the type of the entrance. For example, if the ball wins a big hit based on entering the first entrance 64, the jackpot E will be higher than if the ball wins a big hit based on entering the second entrance 640. It may be difficult to select. As a result, the jackpot E can be made difficult to continue. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the low-probability state of the normal symbol, which is disadvantageous for the player, from being repeated endlessly, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation for the game. Also, the jackpot E when the ball hits the jackpot based on the ball entering the second entry port 640, rather than when the ball hits the jackpot based on the ball entering the first entry port 64. May be easily selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpots A to D from being continuous and the high-probability state of the normal symbol, which is advantageous for the player, being repeated for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from having an excessively high ball ejection rate, which causes an unexpected disadvantage in the hall.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the third embodiment, two types of ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64 and second ball entry port 640) are provided, and the jackpot is set to a high probability state of a normal symbol. 2 It was easy for the ball to enter the ball entry port 640. As a result, the number of reserved balls tends to reach the maximum value (that is, 4) during the jackpot.

In addition to this, in this modification, two types of specific winning openings (specific winning opening 65a and specific winning opening 650a) are provided, and when a ball wins a special winning opening 650a during a big hit, the big hit ends. It is configured to later shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol. Further, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is configured to be different depending on whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit by the lottery or the special symbol 2 is a big hit by the lottery. That is, the ease of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol differs between the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit and the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit. Although the details will be described later, it is possible to prevent the ball exit rate from becoming too high by providing an entry port that makes it difficult to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, by providing an entry port that facilitates the transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol, the ball enters the entry port, giving the player a sense of expectation for the high-probability state of the special symbol. Can be embraced.

First, with reference to FIG. 72, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, in the game board 13 in the modified example of the third embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in the lower right portion of the front view as in the third embodiment. A second entry port 640 is provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640, and by hitting a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a rotates about a direction perpendicular to the game board 13. , The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize at the second entrance.

In addition, in this modified example, the variable winning device 650 is provided in the lower left direction of the first ball entry port 64. This variable winning device 650 is composed of a specific winning opening 650a and an electric accessory 650b attached to the specific winning opening 650. Normally, the electric accessory 650b closes the specific winning opening 650a to hold a ball. It is difficult to get the ball in. On the other hand, in a predetermined round (for example, the second round) of the jackpot, the electric accessory 650b operates for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds) to open the specific winning opening 650a. As a result, the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the specific winning opening 650a, and if the ball can be won, it shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. This high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times, as in the third embodiment. In this way, whether or not the ball enters the specific winning opening 650a determines whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol. Can be visually understood. In addition, since the player can devise the timing of launching the ball, if the player can enter the ball into the specific winning opening 650a, he / she has acquired a high probability state of the special symbol by himself / herself. It is possible to make the player feel satisfied and fulfilled.

Further, as described above, since the specific winning opening 650a is arranged at the lower left of the first entry opening 64, the player is specified in the round (for example, the second round) in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened. A ball launched in an attempt to win a prize in the winning opening 650a can easily win a prize in the first winning opening 64 as well. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are easily stored in the jackpot, but in this modified example, in addition to this, a predetermined round (for example, the second round) ), It is easy to increase the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1. Since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be stored up to 4 each, in this modified example, the total number of reserved balls is 8 by the end of the jackpot. It can be easily made into an individual state. As a result, in the special fluctuation period set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which the number of reserved balls does not exist and the fluctuation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly without ending the special fluctuation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, when the pseudo interval effect is configured to end in a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect is executed eight times, the non-variation state (variation pattern effect is not executed). In addition, the more likely it is that a reserved ball does not exist), the less the number of lottery of special symbols executed during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again after the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in this modified example, as described above, the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640 during the jackpot, so that the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are reserved. It is configured so that the number of balls is likely to be maximized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state from becoming non-variable during the pseudo-interval effect, and it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a big hit again after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the first type selection table 202b of this modification will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is different between the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit and the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit. In the first hit type selection table 202b of this modification, the jackpot type and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a for each type of the special symbol are defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2. The pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that the specific winning opening 650a is opened only in the second round of the jackpot, and in the other rounds (first round, third round and thereafter), the specific winning opening is opened. The mouth 65a is configured to be open. The specific winning opening 650a opened in the second round is closed when the opening period specified in the first type selection table 202b elapses. Further, in the second round of the jackpot, a display (left-handed navigation) prompting the player to launch the ball on the left side of the game board 13 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to aim at the specific winning opening 650a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to acquire the high probability state of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 0 to 8, the jackpot type is “big hit A1” (3R short open jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is three. Further, when the "big hit A1" is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds in the second round of the big hit. On the other hand, when the "big hit A1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds.

It should be noted that it takes 0.5 seconds or more for the launched ball to reach the specific winning opening 650a after the player launches the ball aiming at the specific winning opening 650a, so that the opening is 0.5 seconds. When the pattern is selected, it is difficult to make the ball win the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, when the "big hit A1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit is completed, and the low probability state of the normal symbol 100 times is set. .. That is, a state corresponding to the case where the jackpot E in the third embodiment is completed is set. On the other hand, when the opening pattern of 5 seconds is selected, it is sufficient time for the launched ball to reach the specific winning opening 650a, so in many cases, the player wins the specific winning ball in the second round. A prize can be given to the mouth 650a. Therefore, when the "big hit A1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big hit, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 9 to 17, the jackpot type is "big hit A2" (3R long open jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is three. In the case of "big hit A2", an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds regardless of whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Therefore, in the second round of "big hit A2", it becomes easy to win a ball into the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the end of the big hit, and it is normal. A high probability state of the symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 18 to 24, the jackpot type is "big hit B1" (4R short open jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is four. Similar to "Big hit A1", if "Big hit B1" is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds in the second round of the big hit. .. On the other hand, when the "big hit B1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when the "big hit B1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, and the low probability state of the normal symbol 100 times is set. .. On the other hand, when the "big hit B1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit is completed, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. ..

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 25 to 31, the jackpot type is "big hit B2" (4R long open jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is four. Similar to "Big hit A2", when "Big hit B2" is won, the special winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds regardless of whether it is a lottery for special symbol 1 or a lottery for special symbol 2. The pattern is set. Therefore, when the "big hit B2" is won, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the end of the big hit, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 32 to 63, the jackpot type is "big hit C1" (6R short open jackpot) with 6 rounds of jackpot. Similar to "Big hit A1" and "Big hit B1", if you win "Big hit C1" in the special symbol 1 lottery, the special winning opening 650a will be opened for 0.5 seconds in the second round of big hit. The pattern is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit C1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when the "big hit C1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, and the low probability state of the normal symbol 100 times is set. .. On the other hand, when the "big hit C1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit is completed, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. ..

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 64 to 95, the jackpot type is "big hit C2" (6R long open jackpot) with 6 rounds of jackpot. Similar to "Big hit A2" and "Big hit B2", when "Big hit C2" is won, the specific winning opening 650a is 5 regardless of whether it is a lottery for special symbol 1 or a lottery for special symbol 2. An opening pattern that is released for a second is set. Therefore, when the "big hit C2" is won, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the end of the big hit, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 96,97, the jackpot type is "big hit D1" (15R short open jackpot) with 15 rounds of jackpot. Similar to "Big hit A1", "Big hit B1", and "Big hit C1", if "Big hit D1" is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the specific winning opening 650a is 0.5 in the second round of the big hit. An open pattern that is open for seconds is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit D1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when the "big hit D1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit is completed, and the low probability state of the normal symbol 100 times is set. .. On the other hand, when the "big hit D1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit is completed, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. ..

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 98,99, the jackpot type is "big hit D2" (15R long open jackpot) with 15 rounds of jackpot. Similar to "Big hit A2", "Big hit B2", and "Big hit C2", if you win "Big hit D2", regardless of whether it is a special symbol 1 lottery or a special symbol 2 lottery. An opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, when the "big hit D2" is won, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the end of the big hit, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the specific winning opening 650a is relatively long (in the second round of the big hit, regardless of the big hit type). It is released (for 5 seconds). If the ball can be won in the specific winning opening 650a, a high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in many cases, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the jackpot is won. A high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the end of.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1, half of the big hits are the big hits in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for an extremely short time (0.5 seconds) in the second round of the big hits ("Big hit A1", "Big hit A1", " "Big hit B1", "Big hit C1", and "Big hit D1"). Therefore, if these jackpots are won in the lottery of the special symbol 1, it becomes difficult to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, a low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. To. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to win a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 as compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, in rounds other than the second round of the jackpot, a display (right-handed navigation) prompting the ball to be launched to the right is displayed in order to win the ball in the specific winning opening 65a. Will be done. Further, since the jackpot of this modified example is given at least 3 rounds, the player has more chances to aim at the right side of the game board 13. As a result, during the big hit, the opportunity to put the ball into the second entrance 640 provided directly above the specific winning opening 65a becomes the opportunity to put the ball into the first entrance 64. It will be more than that. Further, in the present modification, when the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, in the special fluctuation period after the end of the big hit, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is given priority, so if the big hit is won in the special fluctuation period, there is a high possibility that the lottery of the special symbol 2 will be a big hit. .. Therefore, the jackpot and the high-probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency at which the jackpot is started again after the pseudo-interval effect executed after the jackpot ends) can be increased. It is possible to raise the expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example has a configuration in which two types of specific winning openings (specific winning opening 65a and specific winning opening 650a) are provided, and when a ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 650a during a big hit. In addition, it is configured to shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. This makes it easy to visually understand whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol. In addition, since the player can devise the timing of launching the ball, if the player can enter the ball into the specific winning opening 650a, he / she has acquired a high probability state of the special symbol by himself / herself. It is possible to make the player feel satisfied and fulfilled.

In addition, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is configured to be different depending on whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit by the lottery or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, and the special symbol 2 is a big hit by the lottery. In the case of, it is configured to be advantageous for the player (that is, there are many chances for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 650a). Further, in the present modification, when the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, in the special fluctuation period after the end of the big hit, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is given priority, so if the big hit is won in the special fluctuation period, there is a high possibility that the lottery of the special symbol 2 will be a big hit. .. Therefore, the jackpot and the high-probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency at which the jackpot is started again after the pseudo-interval effect executed after the jackpot ends) can be increased. It is possible to raise the expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time.

Further, since the specific winning opening 650a is arranged at the lower left of the first entry opening 64, the player wins a prize in the specific winning opening 650a in the round (second round) in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened. It becomes easier for the ball launched to be made to win a prize in the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, in the second round, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1. As a result, in the special fluctuation period set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which the number of reserved balls does not exist and the fluctuation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly without ending the special fluctuation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the special fluctuation period, when the pseudo interval effect is configured to end in a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect is executed eight times, the state of no variation (variation pattern). The more likely it is that the effect is not executed and there is no reserved ball), the more the number of lottery of special symbols executed during the pseudo-interval effect decreases. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again after the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in this modified example, as described above, the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640 during the jackpot, so that the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are reserved. It is configured so that the number of balls is likely to be maximized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state from becoming non-variable during the pseudo-interval effect, and it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a big hit again after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this modified example, compared to the lottery of the special symbol 1, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol is high. , Not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the special symbol 1 may be configured so that there is a higher possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol in the case of a big hit. As described above, in the third embodiment and the modified example of the third embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, the first entry is made until the low probability state of the normal symbol ends. A suggestion display prompting the ball to enter the ball mouth 64 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the lottery of the special symbol 1 is mainly executed in a low probability state of the normal symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, if it is difficult to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the low probability state of the special symbol is repeated endlessly, and the player's motivation for the game is reduced. There is a risk that it will end up. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation of the player by increasing the possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1.

In this modification, the specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened for 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round or the third round, or may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds. Further, it may be configured to provide a round that is open only in a part of the jackpots. For example, a round may be provided in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened only at the "big hit D1" and the "big hit D2". Further, the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a is not limited to the mode of this modification, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the opening period may be 1 second and 10 seconds.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. In the first embodiment described above, a variation pattern effect having a fixed variation period is selected for each number of lottery of special symbols in the special variation period. More specifically, if the lottery for the first or second special symbol after the end of the jackpot is missed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (special fluctuation A) is selected and the jackpot is hit. If the lottery for the 3rd or 4th special symbol after the end is missed, the variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected, and the 5th to 8th special symbols performed after the jackpot ends. If the lottery was missed, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds was selected. With this configuration, the time required to execute the deviation pattern effect a predetermined number of times (8 times in the first embodiment) is set to a fixed time (8 seconds). In addition, if a big hit occurs between the end of the big hit and the eight special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time is set according to the remaining predetermined number of times (remaining time until the predetermined time) (for example, the first time). By setting 8 seconds for the second time and 6 seconds for the second time), the special fluctuation period was configured to be a fixed time (8 seconds). In other words, in order to set the special fluctuation period to a predetermined time (8 seconds) in all the lottery times, it is necessary to prepare fluctuation patterns that are jackpots with different fluctuation times according to all the fluctuation times.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, for each number of lottery of special symbols in the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation of the fixed fluctuation period depends on whether the lottery result and the lottery result (look-ahead result) of the holding area are big hits. It is configured so that the pattern effect is selected. As a result, the fluctuation pattern production that becomes a jackpot and the fluctuation pattern production that deviates from the time when the lottery result (look-ahead result) of the jackpot can be determined correspond to the remaining predetermined number of times (remaining time until the predetermined time). The production time can be set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of production time of the variable pattern production that becomes a big hit, and thus the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. Further, regardless of whether or not a jackpot is obtained in the middle of the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed a plurality of times in one special fluctuation period can be gradually reduced. Here, in the first embodiment, when a big hit is made during the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation pattern production executed one time before, except for the case where the big hit is made in the eighth lottery. It was configured so that the production was selected. For this reason, the player may be able to recognize that a big hit was made in the middle of the special fluctuation period by executing the fluctuation pattern production with a long fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period, and the subsequent interval production may be performed. There was a risk that it would not be possible to enjoy it. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern production can be reduced as the number of lottery of the special symbol increases regardless of whether or not the jackpot is obtained in the middle of the special fluctuation period. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not it is a big hit depending on the time. Therefore, since it is difficult to predict the result of the pseudo-interval effect in advance, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the content of the special variation pattern selection table 202e of the ROM 202 is changed in the main control device 110. is there. The first execution is performed for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special variation pattern selection table 202e according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a special variation pattern selection table 202e. The special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is a data table for determining the fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 74, the special variation pattern selection table 202e in the fourth embodiment shows the number of lottery of special symbols after the big hit is completed, and whether or not there is a lottery result of the big hit in the starting ball or the reserved ball. The fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period is specified according to the above. According to this special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e, when there is a reserved ball that becomes a big hit, the jackpot fluctuation of the reserved ball and the reserved ball that displays the deviation variation until the fluctuation of the reserved ball is executed are special. The fluctuation period is configured to be a fixed time (8 seconds).

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 74 shows the correspondence between the variable effect, the jackpot effect, and the state of the specific winning opening executed during the pseudo-interval effect executed after the end of the jackpot. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a big hit is obtained in the third special symbol lottery after the jackpot is completed, and FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the jackpot is the seventh special symbol after the jackpot is completed. It is a figure which showed the case which becomes a big hit in the lottery. For example, when the big hit is achieved in the third special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, that is, when the first special symbol lottery is performed after the jackpot ends, the lottery result stored in the reserved second area is displayed. When it is determined by pre-reading that it is a big hit, a special variation F having a variation time of 4 seconds is selected as the mode of the variation pattern effect to be executed for the first time. Further, when the execution of the special variation F is completed and the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the execution area (that is, when the second special symbol lottery timing is reached after the end of the jackpot), the reserved first area is changed. Since the jackpot is reached, the special fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected. Further, in the special symbol lottery executed for the third time after the jackpot is completed, the data in the execution area is the lottery result indicating the jackpot, so the special variation A having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected (FIG. 75). (A)).

In another case, if the 7th special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends is a big hit, there is no information indicating the jackpot in the reserved ball in the 1st to 3rd special symbol lottery. .. Therefore, the special fluctuation A (2 seconds) is selected for the first and second times, and the special fluctuation B (1 second) is selected for the third time. In addition, in the mode of the variation pattern production executed from the 4th to the 7th times, the probability change number is the 4th time and the hold 3 is hit, the 5th time is the 5th time and the hold 2 is hit, and the 6th time is the probability change. Since the number of times is the 6th time and the hold 1 is hit, and the 7th time is the 7th time and the start is the hit, the 4th and 5th times are special fluctuations B (1 second), and the 6th and 7th times are special fluctuations. C (0.5 seconds) is selected (FIG. 75 (b)).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot is set to 8 seconds, and the type of production time of the fluctuation pattern production is 7 of special fluctuations A to G. Types Compared to the required first embodiment, it can be configured with five types of special variations A to D and F, which are less production time types. In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed a plurality of times in one special fluctuation period can be surely gradually reduced.

Therefore, the types of various tables such as the display data table according to the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern can be reduced as compared with the first embodiment, and the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. Further, in the first embodiment, the player can recognize that the jackpot has been achieved in the middle of the special fluctuation period due to the longer fluctuation time of the fluctuation display, and the player can recognize the final effect of the special fluctuation period. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game without causing the problem that the interest in the game may be lowered.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84. In the first embodiment, the payout speed of the prize balls is set to be constant. That is, when the prize balls are paid out, the payout is suspended for 1 second (a 1-second payout suspension period is set) every time 10 prize balls are continuously paid out by the payout motor 216. .. Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 was set so that the time required for the payout motor 216 to pay out 10 prize balls was 1 second.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured so that the payout speed of the prize balls differs depending on the number of rounds. Specifically, the payout speed of the prize balls (rotational speed of the payout motor 216) becomes slower as the number of rounds progresses, and the period during which the prize balls are paid out becomes longer toward the latter half of the jackpot. As a result, the prize balls are paid out little by little even during the pseudo-interval production after the jackpot is finished, and the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo-interval production. .. That is, by suppressing the concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo-interval effect, it is more difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the end of the jackpot.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the payout speed selection table 202g is added to the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and the RAM 203. The payout counter 203n is added to, some of the processes included in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different, and the issue is executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111. The point is that the various processes performed are different. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout rate selection table 202 g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 77, but this payout speed selection table 202 g is referred to for setting the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out the prize balls in each round of the jackpot. The data table to be created. By referring to the payout speed selection table 202 g, the payout speed of the prize ball can be slowed down in the latter half round of the jackpot. Therefore, since the payout of the prize balls during the jackpot continues even after the end of the jackpot (that is, during the pseudo-interval production), the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo-interval production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed.

FIG. 76B is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The payout counter 203n is a counter that is updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, the payout speed of the prize ball is changed based on the value of the payout counter 203n and the specified contents of the payout speed selection table 202g described above. If the value of the payout counter 203n is 0, it indicates a normal state other than the jackpot state, or a state of the first round of the jackpot. Then, the value of the payout counter 203n is added by 1 each time the jackpot round progresses. That is, the value of the payout counter 203n is the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of rounds of the jackpot. The value of the payout counter 203n is cleared to 0 at the end of the jackpot (see S1242 in FIG. 80). Further, 0 is also set when the RAM 203 is initially set (see S1014 in FIG. 30) in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 30).

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the payout rate selection table 202 g will be described. As described above, the payout speed selection table 202 g is a data table referred to for setting the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out the prize balls in each round of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the payout speed selection table 202g, the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is defined in association with the value of the payout counter 203n. Specifically, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, in the first round of the jackpot or in the normal state), the normal speed is set as the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 (that is, in the normal state). 10 prize balls are paid out per second). If the value of the payout counter 203n is 1 (that is, in the second round of the jackpot), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is "low speed 1", that is, 8 prizes per second. The speed at which the ball is paid out is set. Also, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, if it is the third round of the jackpot), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is "low speed 2", that is, 6 pieces per second. The speed at which the prize balls are paid out is set. On the other hand, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, if it is after the fourth round of the jackpot), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is "low speed 3", that is, 5 per second. The speed at which individual prize balls are paid out is set.

In this way, as the round of jackpots progresses, the speed at which prize balls are paid out gradually slows down, so that the payout of prize balls during the jackpot is after the end of the jackpot (that is, a pseudo-interval effect). Middle) will also be continued. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed. In addition, even if the jackpot is not achieved after the pseudo-interval production, the prize balls will continue to be paid out so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. The feeling can be reduced. The payout speed is not limited to the value specified in the payout speed selection table 202g of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily set. Further, the variation of the payout speed is not limited to four types (normal speed, low speed 1, low speed 2, and low speed 3). For example, the payout speed may be set to two types, and the variation may be smaller than that of the present embodiment. Further, the variation may be increased as compared with the present embodiment, for example, the payout speed may be set to 10 types.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As described above, this main process is a process of executing the main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

Of these main processes, in each of the processes S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment are performed. Will be executed. Then, in the main process of the fifth embodiment, when the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read by the process of S1103, the payout command setting process is then executed (S1141), and further. Instead of the jackpot control process (S1104) in the first embodiment, the jackpot control process 4 (S1141) is executed. Details of these payout command setting processes (S1141) and jackpot control process 4 (S1142) will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80 that follow.

First, the above-mentioned payout command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 79. This payout command setting process is a process for setting a payout command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out the prize ball. The payout command is set in a form including information indicating the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216. From this payout command, the payout control device 111 executes the payout of the prize balls based on the information indicating the number of prize balls and the information indicating the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216.

In the payout command setting process (see FIG. 79), first, it is determined whether or not the winning information exists (S4201). Here, the winning information includes not only the winning of the ball for the specific winning opening 65a, but also the winning information for the first winning opening 64 and the normal winning opening 67. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that there is no winning information (S4201: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that the winning information exists (S4201: Yes), then whether or not the winning information indicating the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a exists in the winning information. (S4202). Then, when it is determined that there is prize information indicating winning in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (S4202: Yes), the value of the payout counter 202n is read out, and the specified contents of the payout speed selection table 202g are obtained. By comparing, the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out the prize balls this time is specified (S4203). Then, a payout command including the information indicating the specified payout speed and the information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out is set (S4204), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S4202, if there is no winning information indicating that the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a has been won (that is, only the winning information for the first winning opening 64 or the normal winning opening 67 exists). When determined (S4202: No), it includes information indicating the payout speed corresponding to the normal speed (that is, the payout speed at which 10 prize balls are paid out per second) and information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out. However, the payout command is set (S4205), and this process is terminated. The payout command set by the process of S4204 or S4205 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Upon receiving the payout command, the payout control device 111 extracts information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout command and information indicating the payout speed, and executes payout based on the extracted information.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 80), the jackpot control process 3 opens and closes the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a during the jackpot, similarly to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process of setting the number of rounds to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round.

In each of the jackpot control processes 4 of S1201 to S1210, the same processes as those of S1201 to S1210 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 4 in the fifth embodiment, it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1202), the opening setting of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (S1203), and the setting of the round number command. When (S1204) is performed, then 1 is added to the value of the payout counter 203n (S1241) to end this process and return to the main process (see FIG. 78). By updating the value of the payout counter 203n at the start timing of a new round, the payout speed can be set to the speed corresponding to each round from the beginning of each round.

Further, in the jackpot control process 4 of the present embodiment, the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and the values after the end of the jackpot are set in various counters (probability changing counter 203e, time saving medium counter 203f, special fluctuation counter 203g). (S1209) Then, the value of the payout counter 203n is set to 0 to reset (S1242), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the payout control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. First, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 111. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this main process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S4301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Next, it waits for the reception of the payout permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 (S4302: No). Then, when the payout permission command is received (S4302: Yes), the RAM access is permitted (S4303), and the external interrupt vector is set (S4304).

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, if it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305) and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305: Yes), the process is performed in S4315 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. Move to. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4305: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area of the RAM 213 (S4306), and if it is not stored (S4306). : No) Since the backup data is not stored, the process is shifted to S4315 also in this case as well. If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the backup area (S4306: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S4307), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S4308: No), that is, it is calculated. If the RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S4315 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly saved.

In the processing after S4315, the initialization processing of the RAM 213 is executed. In this initialization process, first, the used area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S4315), and the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S4316). After that, the MPU211 peripheral device is initially set (S4317), interrupts are permitted (S4318), and the process shifts to the payout control process described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not pressed (S4305: No), the power cutoff occurrence information is set (S4306: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. (S4308: Yes), the process at the time of power restoration (process at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff is restored (S4309), and the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (S4310). In addition, the MPU211 peripheral device is initially set (S4311), and the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 213 (S4312). Further, it is confirmed whether or not the interrupt is in the enabled state before the power is turned off (S4313), and if the interrupt is in the enabled state (S4313: Yes), the interrupt is permitted (S4314), while the interrupt is disabled when the power is turned off. If it is in the state (S4313: No), the process is returned to the address before the power is cut off while the interrupt is disabled.

Next, the above-mentioned payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 82. This payout control process is executed following the main process of the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 81), and is a process for setting the payout of prize balls and rental balls. In this payout control process, first, a command from the main control device 110 is acquired, the total number of prize balls is stored (S4401), and then the launch permission is set for the launch control device 112 (S4402). ). Then, the state of the state return switch is checked, and if the state return switch is pressed, the state return operation is executed (S4403). Here, the state return switch is a switch for causing the payout motor 216 to perform a state return operation by being pressed by a clerk in the hall or the like when a payout error such as a ball jam occurs. Specifically, when the state return switch is pressed, the payout motor 216 rotates in the opposite direction to the normal state as a state return operation, so that ball clogging can be eliminated (that is, return to the normal state). It is configured.

After that, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate unit 15 (S4404). That is, the full tank state of the lower plate unit 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full tank switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full tank state is set and the lower plate is no longer full. Occasionally, the lower plate full tank release state is set. Further, the setting of the state without the tank ball or the state without the tank ball is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S4405). That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the setting of the state without a tank ball is executed when there is no tank ball, and the state without a tank ball is released when there is no tank ball. Perform the settings. After that, the presence or absence of the notification state is determined, and if there is a notification state, the notification is performed by the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S4406).

Next, each process of S4407 to S4409 executes a process for paying out the prize ball. That is, if the prize balls cannot be paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in the process of S4401 is not 0 (S4407: No, S4408: No), the prize ball control process is started (S4409). On the other hand, if the prize balls cannot be paid out (S4407: Yes) or the total number of prize balls is 0 (S4408: Yes), the process proceeds to the process for paying out the loaned balls. The prize ball control process (S4409) will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.

In the process for paying out the ball lending in S441 to S4412, if the ball lending is not in a non-payable state and the ball lending request from the card unit is received (S4410: No, S4411: Yes) The sphere control process (S4412) is started. On the other hand, if the ball lending is not possible (S4410: Yes) or the ball lending request is not received (S4411: No), the subsequent ball removal process is executed (S4413). The ball lending control process (S4412) will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

In the ball removal process (S4413), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch is checked and the ball removal operation is not started (S4413). Subsequently, the control of the vibrator provided on the tank rail (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged (S4414). Specifically, when a ball clogging occurs in the vicinity of the tank rail, vibration is applied to the tank rail by driving a vibrator to eliminate the ball clogging. After that, the process returns to the beginning of the main payout control process, and thereafter, the above-described processes S4401 to S4414 are repeatedly executed.

Next, the above-mentioned prize ball control process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this prize ball payout process. In this prize ball payout process, first, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is driven at a speed based on the payout command output from the main control device 110, and the prize ball is paid out (S4501). Next, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4502), and if it is determined that the rotation is not normal (S4502: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to perform a retry process. Is executed and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4503), this process is completed, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

When it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S4502: Yes), it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game ball is normally counted (S4504). Then, when it is determined that the count of the game balls is not normal (S4504: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the retry process, and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4505) to perform this process. It ends and returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

Further, when it is determined that the count of the game balls is normal as a result of the processing of S4504 (S4504: Yes), whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls (that is,). Whether or not the payout of the prize balls instructed by the payout command is completed) is determined (S4506), and if the payout is completed (S4506: Yes), the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4507). This process is completed and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4506 that the payout of the prize balls has not been completed (S4506: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

Next, the above-mentioned ball lending control process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this ball lending control process. In the ball lending control process, first, the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the payout of the ball lending (S4601). Next, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal is determined by the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4602), and if it is determined that the rotation is not normal (S4602: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the retry process. At the same time, the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4603), this process is completed, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

Further, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S4602: Yes), it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game ball is normally counted. (S4604). Then, in the process of S4604, when it is determined that the count of the game balls is not normal (S4604: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the retry process, and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S1205). ), The process is completed and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

Further, in the process of S4604, when it is determined that the count of the game balls is normal (S4604: Yes), the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rented balls (25 pieces) and the payout is made. It is determined whether or not it is completed (S4606), and if the payout is completed (S4606: Yes), the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4607), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4606, if it is determined that the payout of the predetermined number of loaned balls (25 pieces) has not been completed (S4606: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is configured so that the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 driven for paying out the prize balls becomes slower as the jackpot round progresses. There is. As a result, the time for paying out the prize balls of the jackpot can be prolonged, so that the prize balls can be continuously paid out even after the jackpot is finished (that is, during the pseudo interval production). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed. In addition, even if the jackpot is not achieved after the pseudo-interval production, the prize balls will continue to be paid out so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, by slowing down the rotation speed of the payout motor 216, the number of prize balls that can be paid out per second is reduced (that is, it is required to pay out the prize balls). It took a long time), but it is not limited to this. For example, the payout speed may be slowed down by increasing the frequency of the payout suspension period. Specifically, for example, a 1-second payout suspension period is set, which is set every time 10 prize balls are paid out at normal times, but as the number of jackpot rounds progresses, 8 prize balls are paid out. The payout suspension period may be set every time or every time five prize balls are paid out. Further, as the number of rounds progresses, the payout suspension period may be lengthened.

In the present embodiment, the payout speed is always slowed up to the third round, and after the third round, the payout speed is set to "low speed 3", which is the slowest, but the payout speed is limited to this. is not it. For example, at the start of each round, a lottery for whether or not to slow down the payout speed may be executed, and the payout speed may be randomly slowed down. Further, the payout speed may be increased or decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if "big hit D (15 rounds big hit)" with a large number of rounds continues, most of the prize balls will be paid out at the slowest payout speed (low speed 3). Therefore, even after the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect are completed and the normal variable pattern effect is executed, the prize ball may continue to be paid out endlessly. In this case, the player may feel uneasy that the payout control of the pachinko machine 10 may be defective. Therefore, for example, in the 5th to 12th rounds of "Big Hit D", the payout speed is returned to the normal payout speed, and in the 13th to 15th rounds, the payout speed is slowed down by one step again. You may. Further, in the middle round of the "big hit D" (for example, 5 rounds or 10 rounds), the payout speed may be set to be faster than the normal speed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being continuously paid out even after the normal fluctuation pattern effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the pachinko machine 10 as having a problem.

In the present embodiment, the payout speed is slowed down with the start of each round of jackpots, but the opportunity to change the payout speed is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the payout speed may be changed based on the number of times the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. For example, when the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a from the 1st to the 7th time, the prize ball is paid out at the normal speed, and the ball is paid out to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the 8th time. If the prize is won, the payout speed is set to "low speed 1" and the prize ball is paid out. If the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a for the 9th time, the payout speed is set to "". If the prize ball is paid out by setting it to "low speed 2" and the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the 10th time, the payout speed is set to "low speed 3" and the prize ball is paid out. May be configured to do. As a result, in one round period, the payout speed can be slowed toward the latter half of the period, so that the prize balls can be paid out during the interval period after the end of each round or during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed. In addition, even if the jackpot is not achieved after the pseudo-interval production, the prize balls will continue to be paid out so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

In addition, the payout speed of the prize ball to be paid out based on the ball winning to the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to another entry opening (first entry opening 64, normal entry opening 67, etc.). ) May be slower than the payout speed of the prize balls paid out based on the winning of the balls, and the prize balls may continue to be paid out even during the special fluctuation period. With such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be directed to the prize ball to be paid out, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the jackpot. In addition, even if the jackpot is not achieved after the pseudo-interval production, the prize balls will continue to be paid out so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. The feeling can be reduced. Further, since the prize balls are paid out more during the big hit, the excessive heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed by slowing down the payout speed in the latter half of the big hit.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the payout speed becomes slower as the round progresses uniformly for all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a look-ahead is executed during a jackpot and it is determined that the lottery result that will be a jackpot is on hold, the prize ball payout speed will be slowed down, and the prize ball will continue to be paid out even during the pseudo interval production after the jackpot. It may be configured as follows. As a result, in the pseudo-interval effect executed between the current jackpot and the next jackpot, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball, so that the player can tell that the jackpot has ended once. Can be made less noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot has continued for a long time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the contrary, in the look-ahead during the big hit, while the lottery result that becomes the big hit is not held, the payout speed is slowed down as the round progresses, and if it is determined that the lottery result that becomes the big hit is held. , The payout speed may be set to a normal speed (or a faster speed than usual). If the lottery result that becomes a big hit is not reserved during the big hit, there is a possibility that the end of the big hit will be notified as a result of the pseudo interval effect. In this case, if the payout speed of the prize balls is slowed down so that the prize balls continue to be paid out even after the end of the jackpot is notified, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. On the other hand, when the big hit is made again via the pseudo interval effect, a large amount of prize balls are paid out even in the next big hit, so that the time required to pay out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, after the repetition of the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect is completed (that is, during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern effect), there is a risk that the payout of the prize ball will continue to be executed for a long time, and the player will be pachinko. There is a risk of misidentifying that a malfunction has occurred in the machine 10. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery result that is a big hit is on hold, by setting the payout speed to the normal speed (or a speed faster than the normal speed), the prize is endlessly awarded during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern production. It is possible to prevent the payout of the ball from continuing to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the pachinko machine 10 as having a problem.

Further, in the first round of the jackpot, the payout speed of the prize balls may be set to be faster than the normal speed (for example, the speed at which 15 prize balls are paid out per second). As a result, the ball used for the jackpot game can be secured earlier, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot play the game during the jackpot game due to the lack of the ball held during the jackpot game. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more entertaining the game during the big hit. In addition, when a big hit is made via the pseudo interval effect (that is, when the big hit is made again in a short period after the previous big hit is finished), the payout speed of the first round is set to the normal speed. If a new big hit is made without going through the pseudo interval effect, the payout speed may be increased. When a big hit is made via a pseudo-interval effect, the big hit is continuous in a short period of time from the end of the previous big hit, so the player has already secured a sufficient number of balls to use for the big hit game. Because it is. In addition, if the payout speed is always increased in the first round, the player can recognize the difference in the payout speed in the jackpot via the pseudo-interval effect, and can recognize whether or not the current is the first round. There is a risk that it will end up. In the present embodiment, there is no jackpot for the number of rounds of 2 or less, so if it can be recognized that the present is the first round, it is suggested that the jackpot will continue in at least two interval productions thereafter. I can recognize it. That is, since the result of the interval effect for two times can be predicted first, it becomes impossible to enjoy the interval effect for the two times. On the other hand, when a big hit is made via a pseudo interval effect, if the payout speed of the first round is set as a normal speed, the player recognizes whether or not it is the first round of a new big hit. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is possible to carefully confirm whether or not the jackpot continues in each interval production. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player in each interval production.

In the present embodiment, the payout command includes information indicating the number of prize balls and information indicating the rotation speed of the payout motor 216, but the payout command is information indicating the payout of one prize ball. It may be configured. For example, when paying out 15 prize balls, the payout command may be output 15 times in a row. Further, each time the jackpot round progresses, the number of payout commands that can be output per second may be reduced (the interval at which the payout commands are output is lengthened). For example, in the first round of the jackpot, the payout command can be output up to 10 times per second, in the second round, the payout command can be output up to 8 times per second, and in the third round. The payout command may be output 6 times per second, and the payout command may be output 5 times per second after the 4th round. As a result, the time from the start to the end of the payout of the prize balls can be delayed, so that the prize balls can be paid out even during the pseudo-interval production. Therefore, since the player's consciousness can be directed to the prize ball to be paid out, it is possible to suppress the attention of the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the payout command includes information indicating the number of prize balls and information indicating the rotation speed of the payout motor 216, but the payout command includes only information indicating the number of prize balls. The payout control device 111 may be configured to change the rotation speed of the payout motor 216. Specifically, for example, depending on the frequency of the payout command (payout command corresponding to 15 prize balls) based on the ball winning the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, whether the current round is in progress or the interval It may be configured to determine whether it is inside, grasp the number of rounds, and slow down the payout speed of the prize ball based on the grasped number of rounds. Also, for example, when the prize ball payout command is continuously output and the prize ball payout corresponding to the newly output payout command is suspended, that is, it is output in time. The payout speed is slowed down when the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the newly output payout command is in stock because the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the payout command continues. You may. Further, in this case, the payout speed may be changed based on the number of unpaid prize balls in stock. For example, when the number of unpaid prize balls is 10, the payout speed may be set to be slower than the normal speed (for example, set to low speed 1). Further, for example, when the number of unpaid prize balls is 30, the payout speed is set to low speed 2, and when the number of unpaid prize balls is 50, the payout speed is set to low speed 3. It may be configured to be set to. In this way, by configuring the payout control device 111 to change the payout speed, it is possible to reduce the types of payout commands output from the main control device 110. In addition, the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot increases, and the closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is delayed, or conversely, the opening timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is delayed. It is possible to prevent problems such as delays from occurring.

Further, a part of the unpaid prize balls stocked in the payout control device 111 may be held until the end of the jackpot, and the stocked prize balls may be paid out after the jackpot ends. As a result, the prize balls can be paid out even during the pseudo-interval production, so that the player's consciousness can be directed to the prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the jackpot. It should be noted that the payout of the stocked prize balls may be started when the jackpot is completed, or the payout may be configured based on a predetermined opportunity. Examples of the predetermined trigger include the timing when the symbol is confirmed and displayed in the fluctuation pattern effect first executed after the jackpot ends, the timing when the jackpot is finished and the start prize is first won.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the payout speed is changed for the pachinko machine 10 that performs the pseudo interval effect has been described, but the payout speed is changed for the gaming machine that does not have the pseudo interval effect function. It may be configured as. Specifically, as the number of rounds of the jackpot progresses, the payout speed may be slowed down so that the payout of the prize balls continues for a certain period of time even after the end of the jackpot. As a result, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<About the modified example of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the period required for the prize balls to be paid out is changed by changing the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216. As a result, the jackpot prize balls were continuously paid out even during the pseudo-interval production, and the player's consciousness was directed toward the prize balls to be paid out.

On the other hand, in this modification, the island equipment that supplies the balls to the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to output a signal for stopping and starting the supply of the balls from the pachinko machine 10. Then, at the end of the big hit, the ball is controlled so that it is difficult to be supplied from the island equipment side, and the prize ball is continuously paid out even during the pseudo interval production after the big hit. As a result, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo-interval production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed. In addition, even if the jackpot is not achieved after the pseudo-interval production, the prize balls will continue to be paid out so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine in this modification and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is that the external output terminal plate 261 is electrically connected to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. In the main control device 110, the ROM 202 is provided with the ball supply setting table 202h instead of the payout speed selection table 202g, and the RAM 203 has the supply stop flag 203o, the stop period counter 203p, and the supply period counter 203q. Is added, and some of the processes included in the main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different. The fifth embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the fifth embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 85, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is provided with an external output terminal 261 in addition to the electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment. The external output terminal 261 is electrically connected to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, and is used to output various information about the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. Here, the various information regarding the pachinko machine 10 includes information indicating whether or not the gaming machine is a big hit, information indicating whether or not a special symbol is changing, information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out, and balls. Information indicating whether or not the supply of the above is necessary can be mentioned. This information is output to the island equipment, the hall computer, etc. via the external output terminal 261.

The hall computer is configured to be able to grasp the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 and determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fraudulent based on the information output via the external output terminal 261. Further, the island equipment supplies balls to the pachinko machine 10 or stops the supply of balls based on the information output via the external output terminal 261. The pachinko machine 10 itself is also provided with a tank for storing balls, but since the number of balls that can be stored is small (for example, 150), a big hit starts even when the tank is full. Even if it is done, the balls stored in the tank are used up in the middle of the jackpot. Therefore, at least from the middle of the jackpot, all the prize balls in the jackpot can be paid out by receiving the supply of additional balls from the island facility.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (a), the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 86A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the ROM 202 in the present modification is provided with the ball supply setting table 202h instead of the payout speed selection table 202g defined in the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, but the ball supply setting table 202h is a data table referred to for setting the state of ball supply from the island equipment in each round of the jackpot. By referring to the ball supply setting table 202h, the payout speed of the prize balls can be slowed down in the latter half round of the jackpot. Therefore, since the payout of the prize balls during the jackpot continues even after the end of the jackpot (that is, during the pseudo-interval production), the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo-interval production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed.

FIG. 86B is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment, the RAM 203 in this modification is provided with a supply stop flag 203o, a stop period counter 203p, and a supply period counter 203q. ..

The supply stop flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the supply of balls from the island equipment is stopped, and if the supply stop flag 203o is off, the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped. Show that. The supply stop flag 203o is switched on and off at a time interval set for each jackpot round. It is also set to on at the start of the jackpot.

The stop period counter 203p is a counter that counts the stop period when the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped. In this modification, the supply stop state is maintained (that is, the supply permission is not set) for 1 second after the instruction to stop the supply of the sphere is given. The initial value (250) of the stop period counter 203p is set at a time interval determined for each jackpot round, and is subtracted by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 88) until the value becomes 0. It is configured in.

The supply period counter 203q is a counter that counts the permitted period when the island equipment is permitted to supply balls. In this modification, the ball supply is permitted for a time specified for each round after the start of the jackpot round or after the suspension of the ball supply is released. The supply period counter 203q is set with a value corresponding to the time specified in the above-mentioned ball supply setting table 202h (see FIG. 87) as an initial value each time the timing for permitting the supply of balls is reached.

Next, the ball supply setting table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the ball supply setting table 202h is a data table for setting the frequency of stopping the supply of balls from the island equipment in each round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 87, in the ball supply setting table 202h, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is defined in association with the value of the payout counter 203n (that is, in association with the number of rounds of the jackpot).

Specifically, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, the first round), the island facility is not instructed to stop the supply of balls. Therefore, the balls stored in the tank of the pachinko machine 10 are preferentially paid out. When the value of the payout counter 203n is 1 (that is, the second round), the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped once every 10 seconds. More specifically, the supply of balls is permitted only for 9 seconds from the start of the second round, and the supply of balls is stopped for 10 seconds after 9 seconds. After that, the supply permission state for 9 seconds and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. In this state, the supply amount of balls supplied from the island facility is set so that the actual payout is delayed in response to the prize ball payout request.

When the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, the third round), the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped once every 5 seconds. More specifically, the supply of balls is permitted only for 4 seconds from the start of the third round, and the supply of balls is stopped from 4 seconds to 5 seconds later. After that, the supply permission state for 4 seconds and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. Further, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, the 4th to 15th rounds), the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped once every 2 seconds. More specifically, the supply of balls is permitted for only 1 second from the start of each round, and the supply of balls is stopped for 1 to 2 seconds. After that, the supply permission state for 1 second and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of each round.

By setting the supply permission state and the supply stop state with reference to the payout counter 203n, it is possible to increase the frequency of stopping the supply of balls to the island equipment as the number of jackpot rounds progresses. it can. That is, a state in which the number of balls to be paid out is insufficient is likely to occur, and the payout of prize balls can be easily interrupted. Therefore, as the round of jackpots progresses, the period from the start of payout of prize balls to the completion of payout can be lengthened, so the prize balls are paid even after the end of the jackpot (that is, during the pseudo interval production). You can keep it out. Therefore, by directing the player's consciousness toward the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo-interval production, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval production. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the pseudo-interval effect after the end.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, various processes executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this modification. As described above, this main process is a process of executing the main control of the game in a cycle of 4 ms.

Of these main processes, the processes S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 are the same as the processes S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 in the main process (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Then, in the main process in this modification, the ball supply setting process (S1151) is executed instead of the payout command setting process (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment. This ball supply setting process is a process for setting the supply of balls to the island equipment or the stop of the supply of balls in each round of jackpots. The details of the ball supply setting process (S1151) will be described with reference to the following FIG. 89.

Next, the above-mentioned ball supply setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 89. As described above, this ball supply setting process is a process for setting the supply of balls to the island equipment or the stop of the supply of balls in each round of jackpots. The instruction content for the island equipment set in this ball supply setting process is output to the island equipment via the external output terminal plate 261.

In the ball supply setting process (see FIG. 89), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is hit (S4701), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S4701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, the first round of the jackpot). (S4702). When it is determined that the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (S4702: Yes), it is not necessary to set the stop of the ball supply to the island equipment, so that the present process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in the process of S4702 that the value of the payout counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 to 14), it is then determined whether or not the supply stop flag is on (S4703). When it is determined that the supply stop flag is on (S4703), it means that the supply of balls from the island facility is stopped. Therefore, by subtracting 1 from the value of the stop period counter 203p, The value is updated (S4704), and it is determined whether or not the value of the stopped period counter 203p after the update is 0 (that is, whether the period for stopping the supply of balls from the island equipment has elapsed) (S4705).

If it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203p is not 0 in the process of S4705, it means that one second, which is the period for stopping the supply of balls from the island facility, has not elapsed, so this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203p is 0, a supply permission is set in order to restart the supply of balls to the island equipment (S4706). Next, the value of the payout counter 203n and the ball supply setting table 202h are referred to, and an initial value is set in the supply period counter 203q (S4707). Then, the supply stop flag 203o is set to off (S4708), and this process is terminated. The initial value set in the supply period counter 203q is a value corresponding to the permission period specified in the ball supply setting table 202h. For example, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 1, the permission period is 9 seconds, so 2250, which is a counter value corresponding to 9 seconds, is set.

When it is determined that the supply stop flag 203o is off in the processing of S4703 (S4703: No), it indicates that the island equipment is currently permitted to supply balls, so that the supply period counter The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of 203q (S4709), and whether the value of the updated supply period counter 203q is 0 (that is, whether the period for permitting the supply of balls from the island equipment has passed). Whether or not it is determined (S4710).

If it is determined that the value of the supply period counter 203q is not 0 in the processing of S4710 (S4710: No), it means that the period for permitting the supply of balls to the island equipment has not passed. End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the supply period counter 203q is 0 (S4710: Yes), the supply stop for stopping the supply of balls to the island equipment is set (S4711). Next, the value of the stop period counter 203p is set to 250 (1 second ÷ 4 ms), which is a value corresponding to 1 second (S4712), the supply stop flag 203o is set to ON (S4713), and this process is completed. To do.

The ball supply permission or supply stop set by this ball supply setting process (see FIG. 89) is output to the island facility via the external output terminal 261. The island equipment supplies balls based on the instructions of each pachinko machine 10 electrically connected via the external output terminal 261.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that the frequency of stopping the supply of balls to the island equipment that supplies the balls increases as the round of big hits progresses. That is, a state in which the number of balls to be paid out is insufficient is likely to occur, and the payout of prize balls is likely to be interrupted. Therefore, as the round of jackpots progresses, the period from the start of payout of prize balls to the completion of payout can be lengthened, so the prize balls are paid even after the end of the jackpot (that is, during the pseudo interval production). You can keep it out. Therefore, by directing the player's consciousness toward the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo-interval production, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval production. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the pseudo-interval effect after the end.

In this modification, the period for paying out the prize balls is changed by changing the frequency of stopping the supply of balls, but the period for paying out the prize balls is changed by changing the period for stopping the supply of balls. It may be configured as follows. For example, as the round progresses, the suspension period of the ball may be increased by 1 second. As a result, as in the present modification, the period in which the prize balls are paid out can be lengthened toward the latter half of the jackpot. Therefore, since the prize balls can be continuously paid out even during the pseudo-interval production, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed.

In this modification, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is high in each round up to the third round, and the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is set to be the highest after the third round, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, at the start of each round, a lottery for increasing or decreasing the supply suspension frequency of balls may be executed, and the supply suspension frequency may be randomly changed. Further, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls may be increased or decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if "big hit D (15 rounds big hit)" with a large number of rounds continues, most of the prize balls will be paid out in a state where the supply of balls is stopped most frequently. Therefore, even after the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect are completed and the normal variable pattern effect is executed, the prize ball may continue to be paid out endlessly. In this case, the player may feel uneasy that the payout control of the pachinko machine 10 may be defective. Therefore, for example, in the 5th to 12th rounds of the "big hit D", the supply of balls is not stopped, and in the 13th to 15th rounds, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is increased one step at a time. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out endlessly even after the normal fluctuation pattern effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the pachinko machine 10 as having a problem.

In the present embodiment, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is increased with the start of each round of jackpots, but the trigger for changing the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the frequency of stopping the supply of the ball may be changed based on the number of times the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. For example, when the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a from the 1st to the 7th time, the supply stop of the ball is not set, and the ball is set to the specific winning opening (large opening) at the 8th time. ) If the ball wins 65a, the supply of the ball is set to stop once every 10 seconds, and if the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the 9th time, 1 every 5 seconds. The supply stop of the ball is set at the frequency of the times, and when the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the 10th time, the supply stop of the ball is set at a frequency of once every 2 seconds. It may be configured as. As a result, in one round period, the supply of balls is stopped more frequently in the latter half of the period. Therefore, since the payout speed becomes slow, the prize balls can be paid out during the interval period after the end of each round or during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot is completed. In addition, even if the jackpot is not achieved after the pseudo-interval production, the prize balls will continue to be paid out so that the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the frequency of stopping the supply of balls increases uniformly as the round progresses in all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a look-ahead is executed during a big hit and it is determined that the lottery result that is a big hit is on hold, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is increased, and the prize balls are paid out even during the pseudo interval production after the big hit. It may be configured to continue. As a result, in the pseudo-interval effect executed between the current jackpot and the next jackpot, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize ball, so that the player can tell that the jackpot has ended once. Can be made less noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot has continued for a long time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the contrary, in the look-ahead during the big hit, while the lottery result that becomes the big hit is not held, the frequency of the supply stop of the ball is increased as the round progresses, and the lottery result that becomes the big hit is held. If it is determined, it may be configured so that the supply of balls is not stopped. If the lottery result that becomes a big hit is not reserved during the big hit, there is a possibility that the end of the big hit will be notified as a result of the pseudo interval effect. In this case, if the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is increased to slow down the payout speed of the prize balls so that the prize balls will continue to be paid out even after the end of the jackpot is notified, the player will be notified. You can immerse yourself in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and you can reduce the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. On the other hand, when the big hit is made again via the pseudo interval effect, a large amount of prize balls are paid out even in the next big hit, so that the time required to pay out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, after the repetition of the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect is completed (that is, during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern effect), there is a risk that the payout of the prize ball will continue to be executed for a long time, and the player will be pachinko. There is a risk of misidentifying that a malfunction has occurred in the machine 10. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery result that is a big hit is on hold, the prize balls are paid out endlessly during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern production by configuring so that the supply stop of the balls is not set. It can be suppressed to continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the pachinko machine 10 as having a problem.

In this modification, in various processes performed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111, the same process as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is executed, but for example, there is no ball in the tank. If so, it may be configured so that the retry process is not performed. In this modified example, by adjusting the supply amount of balls from the island equipment, it is configured so that the balls to be paid out are insufficient, so it is useless to perform the retry process every time the balls are insufficient. That's why.

In this modified example, the prize balls were configured to be paid out in sequence when the balls to be paid out were supplied from the island equipment, but the payout should be suspended until a certain amount of balls are supplied from the island equipment. It may be configured. For example, the payout may be suspended until a total of 150 balls are supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the prize balls may be collectively paid out when the 150 balls are supplied. As a result, it is possible to add inflection to the payout method, so that the player can be entertained. Further, the reserved payout may be configured to be paid out based on a predetermined opportunity. Examples of the predetermined trigger include the timing when the symbol is confirmed and displayed in the fluctuation pattern effect first executed after the jackpot ends, the timing when the jackpot is finished and the start prize is first won.

Further, in this modified example, an example in which the frequency of stopping the supply of the ball is changed for the pachinko machine 10 that performs the pseudo interval effect has been described, but the ball for the pachinko machine 10 that does not have the pseudo interval effect The frequency of supply stoppage may be changed. Specifically, as the number of rounds of the jackpot progresses, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls may be increased so that the prize balls will continue to be paid out for a certain period of time even after the jackpot ends. As a result, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified example of the first embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. In this modification, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the first embodiment. Specifically, when a prize information command is received, it is determined whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation that is executed beyond the special fluctuation period, and if it is a fluctuation that exceeds the special fluctuation period, it is decided whether to execute a special effect. Will be executed. In the special effect, an effect for urging the button to be pressed as shown in FIG. 20A is displayed.

First, the command determination process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a command determination process of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. Among the command determination processes, in each of the processes S1601 to S1608 and each process of S161 to S1620, each process of S1601 to S1608 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and S161 to S1620 The same process as each process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of this modification, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1608), then the look-ahead time setting process is executed (S1650). End the process. This look-ahead time setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 91 that follows.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead time setting process (S1650) executed in the process of S1650 of the command determination process (FIG. 90). In the look-ahead time setting process (FIG. 91, S1650), first, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern production is calculated based on the prize information command received from the main control device 110, and the calculated fluctuation time is transferred to the prize information storage area 223a. Store (S1651). Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern effect continues for a period equal to or longer than the period set as the special fluctuation period (S1652), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern effect ends within the special fluctuation period (S1652: No), it is as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation exceeds the special fluctuation period (S1652: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received winning command is a big hit (S1653). Then, when it is determined that the result is the lottery result of the big hit (S1653: Yes), the door effect is set for each change up to the change of the big hit (S1654). Specifically, a production is set in which the boy discovers a new door each time the fluctuation is executed. In addition, the door to be found may be provided with a plurality of modes. For example, if the jackpot continues, the golden luxury door may be easily found, and if the jackpot does not continue, the simple wooden door may be provided. The door may be configured to be easy to find.

When the processing of S1654 is completed, next, from the fluctuation pattern production before the fluctuation that becomes the big hit to the fluctuation pattern production that becomes the big hit, the continuous hitting effect that the door is opened by pressing the frame button 22 is set. (S1655). After that, this process ends.

Here, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, the door is opened, and an effect that makes the player think that the jackpot game is continuing is executed.

Further, in the process of S1653, if it is determined that the result of the lottery is out of order (S1653: No), the effect counter (any of 0 to 198) is acquired (S1656), and the special effect lottery is executed. (S1657). In the special effect lottery, it is determined whether the acquired effect counter value is any of 0 to 39.

When it is determined that the special effect lottery has been won (S1657: Yes), the period until the variation of the effect corresponding to the received winning command is completed is set, and the door effect is set (S1658). Here, an effect in which the doors appear continuously is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol that is established before the reserved ball that has won the special effect lottery. Then, an effect (S1658) that suggests the occurrence of a continuous hitting effect that encourages the pressing of the frame button 22 over a plurality of fluctuations is set (S1658). After that, this process ends.

In this way, as a result of executing the look-ahead, the effect is executed in a period straddling a plurality of fluctuations, so that it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand the boundary between the fluctuations even if the fluctuations are actually straddled. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol is changed in the production of the special fluctuation period, and it is possible to make the player think that a plurality of jackpots are one jackpot production. ..

As described above, in this modification, when the special effect period is exceeded, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the continuous hit effect, which is a special effect, is executed. Furthermore, if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, a special effect is forcibly set, so the player expects that the big hit will continue when the special effect is displayed. It can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from getting tired of the game and play the game. In addition, by executing the look-ahead process, a special effect period can be set based on the lottery result before the start of the fluctuation, and an effect of continuing the jackpot game can be executed.

Therefore, the player can feel that the jackpot period continues for a long time, and can enjoy the improvement of the interest of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, by executing the door effect for a plurality of fluctuations, the door effect is set a plurality of times in succession, so that the player is expected to continue the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect that counts down the period until the continuous hitting effect is started may be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, the door is opened at each jackpot interval period (see FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b)), but the door is opened (see FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b)). ) An interval period for executing an effect different from the effect for opening the door may be provided. That is, it may be configured to execute an effect different from the pseudo interval effect during the interval period. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot interval is in progress at the time when the effects of different modes occur. Therefore, since it is possible to recognize that the next round will start after the end of the effect before the end of the effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the jackpot will continue.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the pseudo interval effect is performed in the total period of the special fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot and the opening period of the jackpot won during the special fluctuation period, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the opening period of the jackpot may not be provided, and the pseudo-interval effect may be completed in the special fluctuation period after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, the interval effect during the jackpot and the effect period of the pseudo interval effect can be shortened, so that the interval between rounds can be shortened. Therefore, the rate of increase of the prize balls to be acquired can be increased. Further, the opening period may be provided only for the jackpot that is won without going through the pseudo-interval effect, and the opening period may not be provided for the jackpot that is won via the pseudo-interval effect. As a result, in the first winning jackpot, the opening effect performed during the opening period can increase the player's expectation that the jackpot will start from now on. Further, an opening period and an ending period may be provided for the jackpot, and the pseudo-interval effect may be executed even during these periods. Further, these periods may be configured to be variable according to the content of the pseudo interval effect and the like. As a result, the production period can be set according to the content of the pseudo-interval effect, etc., so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the difference between the production period and the production content. it can.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of rounds is displayed during the jackpot, but the number of rounds may not be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand how many jackpot rounds will be awarded, so the jackpot can be expected while giving the player the expectation that the jackpot will not last for a long time. You can play a game. Further, in this case, when displaying the end of the pseudo interval effect, the total number of rounds digested by the player while the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect are repeated may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can be made aware of the number of rounds that have been digested. Therefore, if a large number of rounds is displayed, the player can be satisfied and the number of rounds is small. If it is displayed, the game can be performed with the goal of acquiring a larger number of rounds in the next jackpot game.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Match the period of the pseudo interval effect after the big hit to the interval effect during the big hit)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, and a predetermined by entering a ball. Opening and closing in which the opening state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted are set in the above-mentioned privilege game state as the state of the ball entry port for giving the valuable value of The setting means, the closing period setting means for setting the closing period, which is the period for closing the ball entrance state by the opening / closing setting means, and the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. The dynamic display execution means to be executed and the execution period setting means for setting the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed by the dynamic display execution means are provided, and the execution period setting means is the privileged gaming state. When the dynamic display of the identification information, which is the result of the specific lottery, is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the above, a period having the same length as the closing period elapses after the end of the privileged gaming state. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the execution period can be set so that the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the time the identification information is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A1, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, the award game transition means shifts the state to a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player. A predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entry port, and the open state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball entry is restricted are opened and closed as the state of the ball entry port. The privilege game state of 1 is set by the setting means, and the closing period, which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means, is set by the closing period setting means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means. Then, when the dynamic display of the identification information that is the specific lottery result is executed in the predetermined period after the end of the award game state, the period of the same length as the closing period after the end of the award game state is The execution period is set by the execution period setting means so that the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the time it elapses.

As a result, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period after the privileged game state ends, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the privileged game state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state has continued for a longer period of time, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the gaming machine A1 includes a suggestion effect executing means for executing a closed period suggestion effect suggesting that the closed period is in the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, a closing period suggestion effect suggesting that the period is closed in a predetermined period is executed by the suggestion effect executing means, so that after the privileged gaming state ends. For a predetermined period of time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the privileged gaming state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state has continued for a longer period of time, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine A2, when the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined period, the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information previously set in the predetermined period. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that an execution period having a length equal to or less than the period is set.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the identification information previously set in the predetermined period Since an execution period having a length equal to or less than the execution period of the dynamic display of is set, the dynamic display of the identification information of the shorter execution period is executed in the latter half of the predetermined period. Therefore, since more predetermined lottery is executed in the latter half of the predetermined period, a specific lottery result is obtained within the predetermined period, and when the game shifts to the award gaming state, the latter half of the predetermined period is executed. It will be easier. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the time until the next privileged game state to start to vary, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the privileged game state has ended.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information up to a predetermined number of times in the predetermined period, and dynamically displays the identification information the predetermined number of times. Of these, when the last dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information is terminated based on the elapse of a period having the same length as the closing period. A4 game machine.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution fixing means in a predetermined period up to a predetermined number of times. Further, among the dynamic display of the identification information of a predetermined number of times, when the dynamic display of the last identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, a period having the same length as the closing period elapses. The dynamic display of the identification information ends.

As a result, the period for executing the closed period suggestion effect is set to be the same length as the closed period, so that the closed period suggestion effect is executed after the closed period or the privilege game state ends. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the game has been played. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state is in progress even after the privileged game state is completed, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state has continued for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A4, when the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result in the predetermined period, the execution period setting means for a period having the same length as the closed period The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the remaining period is set as the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating a specific lottery result is set by the execution period setting means in a predetermined period, the closing period is defined as the closing period. Since the remaining period for the period of the same length is set as the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information, it is a closed period or a privileged gaming state regardless of whether or not a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the closing period suggestion effect is being executed after the end of. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state is in progress even after the privileged game state is completed, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state has continued for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In either the gaming machine A4 or A5, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set in the predetermined period, the execution period setting means is set based on the remaining number of times with respect to the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine A4 or A5, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the remaining number of times is set. Since the execution period of the dynamic display is set based on the number of times of, it is possible to make it difficult for the length of the closing period suggestion effect to vary. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the privileged game state is completed and the closed period suggestion effect is executed.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, when the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the period having the same length as the closing period, the execution period setting means has the same length as the closing period. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that it is set based on the remaining time until the period of 1 elapses.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the period of the same length as the closing period. Since the execution period is set based on the remaining time until a period having the same length as the closing period elapses, it is possible to make it difficult for the length of the closing period suggestion effect to vary. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the privileged game state is completed and the closed period suggestion effect is executed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the closing period setting means selects a period of 1 from a plurality of periods having different lengths and sets it as the closing period.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a period of 1 is selected from a plurality of periods having different lengths by the closing period setting means and is set as the closing period. The length can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the privileged game state is completed and the closed period suggestion effect is executed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, when the specific lottery result is not obtained in the lottery executed by the lottery means by the end of the period having the same length as the closing period of 1, the award game The gaming machine A9 provided with an end notification means for notifying that the state has ended.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, if the lottery executed by the lottery means by the end of the period having the same length as the closing period of 1 is a specific lottery result. If not, the end notification means notifies that the privileged gaming state has ended, so that there is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the privileged gaming state has ended.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in a period having the same length as the closing period, the identification information is transmitted to the player's line of sight. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that it is dynamically displayed at a position off the center.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, identification is performed when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means during the period of the same length as the closing period. Since the time-specific information is dynamically displayed at a position where the information is off the center of the player's line of sight, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the privileged game state is completed and the closed period suggestion effect is executed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the privileged gaming state has a plurality of types in which the number of times of the opened state set by the opening / closing setting means is different from each other, and the privileged game transition means is the lottery. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that when a specific lottery result is obtained by means, one type is selected and set from the plurality of types of the privileged gaming states.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privileged gaming state has a plurality of types in which the number of open states set by the opening / closing setting means is different from each other. When a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, one type is selected and set by the privilege game transition means from a plurality of types of privilege game states.

This makes it difficult to predict how many times the open state will be set in the privileged game state. Therefore, when the open state is set a plurality of times, the open state may be set a plurality of times in one privilege game state, or the multiple open states may be caused by continuously shifting to the award game state a plurality of times. It can be difficult to distinguish whether it is set. Therefore, since the game can be executed while expecting that many open states are set, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Perform the same production as the interval production after the big hit)
An effect executing means for executing an effect, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. , A ball entry port to which a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering, and a closed state in which the ball can enter an open state and a ball entry is restricted as the state of the ball entry port. The effect execution is provided with the opening / closing setting means for setting the privilege game state of 1 and the closing period setting means for setting the closing period which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is set to the closed state by the opening / closing setting means. The means is characterized in that, in the effect executed in a predetermined period after the privileged gaming state ends, the same image as the closed period image, which is the image displayed in the effect executed in the closed period, is displayed. Game machine B1.

According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. In addition, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state that is advantageous to the player. A predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entry port, and the open state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball entry is restricted are opened and closed as the state of the ball entry port. The privilege game state of 1 is set by the setting means, and the closing period, which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means, is set by the closing period setting means. In the effect executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period after the privilege game state ends, the same image as the closed period image displayed in the effect executed in the closed period is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to make the user feel that the privileged game state continues during a predetermined period after the privileged game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, has continued for a longer period of time, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, the privilege game state has a plurality of types in which the number of times of the open state set by the opening / closing setting means is different from each other, and the privilege game transition means is specified by the lottery means. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that when a lottery result is obtained, one type is selected and set from the plurality of types of the privileged gaming states.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the privileged gaming state has a plurality of types in which the number of open states set by the opening / closing setting means is different from each other, and a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. In the case of, one type is selected and set from a plurality of types of privilege game states by the privilege game transition means, so that the number of open states to be set is predicted when the privilege game state is reached. It can be difficult. Furthermore, since the closed period image is displayed in a predetermined period, when the open period is set a plurality of times, it may be the open period of one privilege game state, or a specific lottery result is obtained in the predetermined period, and the privilege is obtained. It is possible for the player to make it difficult to predict whether the opening period is set a plurality of times as a result of shifting to the gaming state a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in the privileged game state while expecting that a large number of opening periods are set, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, a period determining means for determining whether or not a period having the same length as the closing period has elapsed after the end of the privileged gaming state, and a period determining means having the same length as the closed period. The gaming machine B3 is provided with an end suggestion effect execution means for executing an end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privileged gaming state when it is determined that the period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, whether or not a period having the same length as the closing period has elapsed after the end of the privileged gaming state is determined by the period determining means, and the closing period is determined. When it is determined that the period of the same length as the above has passed, the end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privilege game state is executed by the end suggestion effect execution means, so that the privilege game state has ended for the player. It has the effect of being able to recognize that.

When the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is the closed period image. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that it is executed in a mode that is hard to see as compared with the above.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the closing period image is displayed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically executes the identification information. Since the display is executed in a manner that is harder to see than the closed period image, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the privileged gaming state ends. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine B4, a display means capable of displaying one or both of the pre-closed period image displayed by the effect executing means and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means on the display screen. When the closing period image and the dynamic display of the identification information are displayed on the display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrow range as compared with the closed period image. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one or both of the closed period image displayed by the effect executing means and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means are displayed on the display screen by the display means. When the display means displays the closed period image and the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrow range as compared with the closed period image.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the period is the closed period or the predetermined period after the privileged game state ends.

In the gaming machine B4, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is such that the identification information is translucent. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that it is displayed by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, when the pseudo-pause suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means has half the identification information. Since it is displayed in a transparent manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the period is the closed period or the predetermined period after the privileged game state ends.

The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6 is provided with a pseudo-dynamic display executing means for pseudo-dynamically displaying the identification information during the grant suspension period.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the dynamic display of the pseudo identification information is executed by the pseudo dynamic display executing means in the closed period, so that the closed period is reached. There is an effect that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the privileged gaming state and the predetermined period after the end of the privileged gaming state.

<Characteristic C group> (The display mode of the pseudo interval effect is determined based on the pre-reading result)
A production execution means for executing the production, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. , The entry port where a predetermined valuable value is given by the entry of the ball, and the open state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted as the state of the entry opening. The opening / closing setting means set in the privileged gaming state of 1, the closing period setting means for setting the closing period which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is set to the closed state by the opening / closing setting means, and the lottery by the lottery means. A dynamic display executing means that executes dynamic display of identification information based on a result, a storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means. A pre-lottery means for executing the predetermined lottery in advance before the lottery condition is satisfied by using the information is provided, and the effect executing means is said to be said in a predetermined period after the privileged gaming state is completed. The closing period suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the period is closed, is executed, and when the specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery means, the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is obtained. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that at least the closing period suggestion effect is executed until the execution of the dynamic display is completed.

According to the gaming machine C1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Using the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, the predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. When a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the state is shifted to the privilege game state which is advantageous for the player by the privilege game transition means. A predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entry port, and the open state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball entry is restricted are opened and closed as the state of the ball entry port. The privilege game state of 1 is set by the setting means, and the closing period, which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means, is set by the closing period setting means. Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the storage means stores the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied. A predetermined lottery is executed in advance by the pre-lottery means before the lottery condition is satisfied using the information stored in the storage means. Here, in the effect executing means, a closed period suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting a closed period, is executed in a predetermined period after the privilege game state ends, and a specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery means. In this case, at least the closing period suggestion effect is executed until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is completed.

As a result, the closing period suggestion effect is executed in the period from the end of the privileged game state to the start of the next privileged game state based on the information indicating the specific lottery result stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make it feel as if the privileged gaming state of 1 is continuing without ending the privileged gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, has continued for a long time, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the effect executing means is determined by the information discriminating means that the information stored in the storage means contains information that will be a predetermined lottery result in the predetermined period, and the information When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period is exceeded by the dynamic display execution means, the closing period suggestion effect is extended until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is provided with means for extending the effect.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, it is determined that the information stored in the storage means by the information determining means includes information that will be a predetermined lottery result in the predetermined period, and that information When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period is exceeded by the dynamic display execution means based on the above, the pause suggestion effect is extended by the effect extension means until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. Therefore, if the length of the pause suggestion effect becomes longer than the predetermined period, the player can be made to recognize that the privileged gaming state may continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can more enjoy the pause suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine C2, during the predetermined period, the information discriminating means determines that the information stored in the storage means includes information that will be a predetermined lottery result, and the dynamic is based on the information. When the display executing means executes the dynamic display of the identification information after the predetermined period is exceeded, the display executing means includes a period determining means for determining in advance the period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the effect executing means sets the content of the closed period suggestion effect extended by the effect extension means based on the period determined by the period determination means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a predetermined period, it is determined that the information stored in the storage means includes information that results in a predetermined lottery, and the dynamic display executing means exceeds the predetermined period based on the information. When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after that, the period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed is determined in advance by the period determination means. Then, based on the period determined by the period determining means, the content of the closed period suggestion effect extended by the effect extending means is set by the effect executing means.

As a result, the content of the closed period suggestion effect extended by the effect extension means can be changed to the content according to the period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the difference between the closing period suggestion effect and the start of the special game state.

The gaming machine C2 or C3 includes a period determining means for determining whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed after the privileged gaming state ends, and the effect executing means uses the period determining means to determine the predetermined period. C4 is a gaming machine C4 provided with an end suggestion effect execution means for executing an end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privileged gaming state when it is determined that

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 or C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the period determination means whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after the privileged gaming state ends. Further, in the effect executing means, when it is determined by the period determining means that a predetermined period has elapsed, the end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privileged gaming state is executed by the end suggestion effect executing means.

This has the effect that the player can clearly recognize whether or not the privileged game state has ended.

In the gaming machine C4, the effect extension means dynamically executes the identification information based on the information resulting in the predetermined lottery after the end suggestion effect executed by the end suggestion effect execution means is completed. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the closing period suggestion effect is executed until the display is completed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the identification information executed based on the information that becomes a predetermined lottery result after the ending suggestion effect executed by the end suggestion effect executing means is completed. Since the closing period suggestion effect is executed by the effect extension means until the dynamic display ends, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a possibility that the privileged gaming state remains even after the end suggestion effect ends. it can. Therefore, even if the end suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the privileged game state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C5, when the closing period suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is compared with the closed period suggestion effect. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that it is executed in a mode that is difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, when the closing period suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is closed. Since it is executed in a mode that is hard to see as compared with the period suggestion effect, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the period during which the closed period suggestion effect is executed and the closed period during the privileged gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make more interested in whether or not the privileged game state is reached after the closing period suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (shortens the effect when a stoppage is detected)
A production execution means for executing the production, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. , A ball entry port to which a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering, and a closed state in which the ball can enter and the ball entry is restricted as the state of the ball entry port. 1. The opening / closing setting means set in the privileged gaming state, the closing period setting means for setting the closing period which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is set to the closed state by the opening / closing setting means, and the operation by the player. A launching means for launching a ball based on the ball and an operation determining means for determining the content of the operation with respect to the launching means are provided, and the effect executing means is closed during a predetermined period after the privileged gaming state ends. The closing period suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the period is set, is executed, and the content of the closed period suggestion effect is changed when the operation determination means determines that the determination result is predetermined. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine D1, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the effect is executed by the effect executing means and a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. Then, a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entry port, and the state of the ball entry port is an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted. Is set in the privileged game state of 1 by the opening / closing setting means, and the closing period, which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means, is set by the closing period setting means. The content of the operation on the launching means that launches the ball based on the operation by the player is determined by the operation discriminating means. In the effect executing means, after the privilege game state ends, the closed period suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the period is closed, is executed, and when the operation discriminating means determines that the result is a predetermined determination, it is simulated. The content of the pause suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means.

As a result, it is possible to execute an effect according to the operation of the player's launching means, so that the closed period suggestion effect can be changed according to the player's taste. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the effect variable means changes the content of the closing period suggestion effect to a content that suggests the end of the privileged gaming state.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed to the content suggesting the end of the privileged gaming state by the effect variable means, so that the privileged gaming state has ended. It is possible to make the player recognize that. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game can be interrupted and take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, whether the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means and the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information are executed. The dynamic display execution determining means for determining whether or not the method is provided, the effect variable means is determined by the operation determining means to be a predetermined determination result, and the dynamic display execution determining means dynamically determines the identification information. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed when it is determined that the display is not executed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means is executed. It is discriminated by the discriminating means. Then, in the effect variable means, when the operation discriminating means determines that the determination result is predetermined and the dynamic display execution discriminating means determines that the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed, the closing period suggestion effect is produced. The content of is variable.

As a result, the player who has confirmed that the content of the closing period suggestion effect has been changed can be made to recognize that the privileged game state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game can be interrupted and take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the content of the closed period suggestion effect is changed, the effect variable means of the closed period suggestion effect before the effect period of the closed period suggestion effect after the change is changed. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the content is variable so as to be shorter than the production period.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means, the effect period of the closed period suggestion effect after the change is variable. Since the content is changed so as to be shorter than the production period of the previous closing period suggestion effect, it is possible to recognize earlier that the game can be interrupted. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

In the gaming machine D4, the effect executing means indicates the end of the privileged gaming state when the predetermined lottery result is not obtained by the lottery means within a predetermined period after the end of the privileged gaming state. The suggestion effect is executed, and the effect variable means changes the content of the closed period suggestion effect to the content of the end suggestion effect when the content of the closed period suggestion effect is changed. Characteristic gaming machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, if the predetermined lottery result is not obtained within the predetermined period after the privileged gaming state ends, the end suggestion suggesting the end of the privileged gaming state. The production is executed by the production execution means. Then, when the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means, the content of the closed period suggestion effect is changed to the content of the end suggestion effect.

As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the privileged game state has ended earlier, so that it is possible to recognize earlier that the game can be interrupted. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, when the operation determining means determines that the player has not performed an operation for causing the launching means to launch a ball for a certain period of time, the predetermined operation determining means The gaming machine D6, which is characterized in that it is determined to be the determination result of the above.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine D1 to the gaming machine D5, it is determined that the player has not performed an operation for causing the launching means to launch the ball for a certain period of time. In that case, since it is determined by the operation determination means that the determination result is a predetermined value, it is possible to suggest to the player that the privileged gaming state has ended earlier and let the player resume the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine D6 includes an operation detecting means for repeatedly detecting at a predetermined cycle whether or not the player is performing an operation for causing the launching means to launch a ball, and the operation determining means is the said. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that it is determined that the determination result is the predetermined determination result when the operation detecting means continuously detects that the player is not operating for a predetermined number of times. ..

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, whether or not the player is performing an operation for causing the launching means to launch a ball is repeatedly detected by the operation detecting means at a predetermined cycle. When the operation detecting means continuously detects that the player is not operating for a predetermined number of times, the operation determining means determines that the result is a predetermined determination. There is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the player is performing the operation.

In the gaming machine D7, the detection means is composed of a touch sensor that detects whether or not the player is touching the launching means, and the operation determining means is such that the player touches the launching means by the operation detecting means. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that it determines that the determination result is the predetermined determination result when the non-existence is continuously detected for a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, a detecting means composed of a touch sensor for detecting whether or not the player is touching the launching means is provided, and the player can use the operation detecting means. When it is continuously detected that the launching means is not touched for a predetermined number of times, the operation discriminating means determines that the determination result is the predetermined result. Therefore, whether or not the player intends to launch the ball. Has the effect of being able to determine more accurately.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closing period is set to a period of a specific length, and the effect executing means is said to be closed for a period of the same length as the period of the specific length. A gaming machine D9 characterized in that it executes a period suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closing period suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means for the same length as the closed period, so that the closed period suggestion effect is produced. It can be difficult to distinguish between the period of execution and the period of closure. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state has continued for a long time, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic E group> (Easy to store the hold of Special Figure 2 during the jackpot)
A game in which the ball entrance and the game state are set to either the first state or the second state, which is a game state in which the ball is easier to enter the ball entrance than the first state. A predetermined lottery is performed based on the establishment of the lottery conditions using the state setting means, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the ball entering the ball entrance, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The lottery means, the privilege game transition means for shifting the state to the privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the specific lottery by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are drawn by the lottery. The gaming machine E1 includes a storage means that can be stored until a lottery is performed by the means, and the gaming state setting means sets the second state during the privileged gaming state.

According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the gaming state is set to either the first state or the second state, which is a gaming state in which the ball is easier to enter the ball entrance than the first state, by the gaming state setting means. In addition, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the ball entering the ball entrance. When the lottery conditions are satisfied, a predetermined lottery using the acquired information is performed by the lottery means, and based on the specific lottery result obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means is advantageous to the player. The state is transferred to the game state. Then, the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means until the lottery by the lottery means is performed. Then, during the privilege game state, the second state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, in the privilege game state, the game state is set so that the ball can easily enter the ball entrance, so that the information can be easily acquired by the acquisition means during the privilege game state. Therefore, since more information is stored by the storage means by the end of the privilege game state, there is an effect that a predetermined lottery can be easily performed after the end of the privilege game state.

In the game machine E1, the value-adding entrance for which a predetermined value is given when the ball enters, and the open state where the ball can enter and the ball for entry as the state of the value-adding entrance. The opening / closing setting means for setting the closed state in which the value is restricted is set in the privileged gaming state of 1, and the closing period for setting the closed state, which is the period for setting the state of the value-adding entrance to the ball, by the opening / closing setting means. A period setting means and an effect executing means for executing a closed period suggestion effect, which is an effect that pseudo-suggests the closed period, are provided in a predetermined period after the privileged gaming state ends, and the predetermined period is provided. Is a gaming machine E2, characterized in that the lottery by the lottery means is a period of a length that can be executed a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined value is given by the ball entering the value-adding entrance, and the open state in which the ball can enter and the entry of the ball are restricted as the state of the value-adding entrance. The closed state is set in one privilege game state by the open / close setting means, and the closed period, which is the period during which the state of the value-adding entrance is closed by the open / close setting means, is set by the closed period setting means. A closing period suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the privilege game state is a closed period, is set by the effect executing means in a predetermined period after the end. Further, in a predetermined period, the lottery by the lottery means is executed a plurality of times.

As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the privileged game state continues while the closing period suggestion effect is being executed, so that the player feels that the privileged game state continues for a long time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the storage means is provided with a predetermined upper limit value for the number of the information that can be stored, and the predetermined period is the number of times equal to or more than the predetermined upper limit value by the lottery means. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the lottery is at least a feasible length of time.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, a predetermined upper limit value is set for the number of information that can be stored in the storage means, and the lottery means exceeds the predetermined upper limit value in a predetermined period. Since the lottery of the number of times can be executed, a specific lottery result can be obtained during the execution of the closing period suggestion effect, and it is possible to easily shift to the privileged gaming state. Therefore, since the privileged game state and the closing period suggestion effect can be easily repeated, the player can feel that the privileged game state has continued for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball is launched at the value-adding entrance as compared with the case where the player launches the ball without aiming at the value-adding entrance. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the ball is provided at a position where it is easier for the ball to enter.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball is aimed at the value-adding entrance as compared with the case where the player launches the ball without aiming at the value-adding entrance. Since the ball entrance is provided at a position where it is easier for the ball to enter, the ball launched aiming at the value-adding entrance to obtain a predetermined game value during the privileged game state. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance, and information is easily acquired by the acquisition means. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be stored in the storage means during the privilege game state.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the second state when the initial setting for the gaming machine is executed.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the initial setting for the gaming machine is executed, the second state is set by the gaming state setting means, so that the privileged gaming state is set. It is possible to match the gaming state in the above with the gaming state set when the initial setting is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming state during the privileged gaming state can be changed to the gaming state in accordance with the gaming rules.

In the gaming machine E5, the gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means can set the first state based on the end of the privileged gaming state.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E5, the first state is set by the gaming state setting means based on the end of the privileged gaming state, so that the second state continues endlessly and the gaming machine is released. As a result of increasing the ball rate, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive stimulation of the player's gambling spirit.

<Characteristic F group> (Variable payout speed of prize balls during jackpot)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on a specific lottery result by the lottery means, and a ball entering are permitted. The ball entry port set to either the ball entry permission state or the ball entry restriction state in which the ball entry is restricted, and the state of the ball entry port are set to the ball entry state in the privilege game state. To pay out valuable objects by the permission setting means for setting the permission state, the payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects when the ball enters the ball entrance, and the payout means. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a variable means for varying the required payout time.

According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the result of a specific lottery by the lottery means, the state is shifted to the privilege game state which is advantageous for the player by the privilege game transition means. In the privilege game state, the state of the ball entry port is set to the ball entry permission state in which the ball is permitted to enter by the permission setting means, and when the ball enters the ball entry port, a predetermined number of balls are set in advance. The valuable object is paid out by the payout means, and the payout time required to pay out the valuable object by the payout means is variable by the variable means.

As a result, it is possible to add inflection to the way valuable objects are paid out during the privileged game state, so that the player can be entertained not only by the amount of valuable objects paid out but also by the way they are paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the privilege game state is configured to have a plurality of ball entry permission periods, which is a period set to the ball entry permission state by the ball entry permission means, and the variable means is the privilege of 1. Of the plurality of ball entry permission periods set in the gaming state, the payout time in the ball entry permission period set in the latter half is longer than the payout time in the ball entry permission period set in the first half. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the payout time is variable as described above.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privileged game state is configured to have a plurality of ball entry permission periods, which are periods set to the ball entry permission state by the ball entry permission means. Further, in the variable means, of the plurality of ball entry permission periods set in one privilege game state, the payout time in the ball entry permission period set in the latter half is the payout time in the ball entry permission period set in the first half. The payout time is variable so that it is longer than.

As a result, it is possible to continue paying out valuable objects even after the privileged game state ends. Therefore, even after the privileged game state ends, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the privileged game state while the valuable object is being paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the privileged gaming state is set between the plurality of ball entry permission periods and the plurality of ball entry permission periods, and the state of the ball entry port is set to the ball entry restriction state. A suggestion effect executing means that is configured to have a ball entry restriction period, which is a period, and executes a restriction suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the ball entry restriction period is reached, after the privilege game state ends. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege game state is set between a plurality of ball entry permission periods and the plurality of ball entry permission periods, and is a period in which the state of the ball entry port is set to the ball entry restriction state. Consists of. Then, after the privileged game state is completed, the restriction suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the ball entry restriction period is reached, is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, even after the privileged game state ends, the player can be made to feel as if he / she is in the privileged game state while the restriction suggestion effect is being executed. Further, since the valuable object continues to be given even after the privileged gaming state ends, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the valuable object to be given. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the period during which the restriction suggestion effect is being executed and the period during which the ball entry is restricted, so that the player feels that the privileged game state continues longer than it actually is. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and the motor rotates by a predetermined rotation amount to pay out the valuable object of the predetermined unit number, and the variable means. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the payout time is changed by changing the rotation speed of the motor.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the payout means has a motor, and the motor rotates by a predetermined amount of rotation to pay out a predetermined number of valuable objects. Then, in the variable means, the payout time is changed by changing the rotation speed of the motor.

This has the effect that an arbitrary payout time can be set accurately by electrically controlling the motor.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and the motor pays out a predetermined number of valuable objects by rotating the motor by a predetermined rotation amount. When the rotation amount determining means for determining whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount and the rotation amount determining means determine that the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, the operation of the motor is performed for a predetermined period of time. A game machine F5 provided with a stopping means for stopping.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the payout means has a motor, and the motor rotates by a predetermined amount of rotation to pay out a predetermined number of valuable objects. Then, whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount is determined by the rotation amount determination means, and when the rotation amount determination means determines that the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, the operation of the motor is stopped. It is stopped for a predetermined period by means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the motor from continuously rotating even when a large amount of valuable objects are discharged. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the motor from being heated by the continuous operation and causing a malfunction in the gaming machine.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F5, the variable means changes the payout time by changing the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, a predetermined period is changed and the payout time is changed by the variable means, so that the rotation speed of the motor can be unified. Therefore, there is an effect that the control for the motor can be simplified.

In the gaming machine F5, the variable means is a gaming machine F7 that changes the payout time by changing the specific rotation amount.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, a specific rotation amount is changed by the variable means and the payout time is changed, so that the payout time is easily controlled by electrical control of the motor. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a storage means for storing the specified information specified in association with the set number of times of the plurality of ball entry permission periods set in the privileged gaming state where the payout time is 1. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the variable means is for changing the payout time based on the specified information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the payout time is defined in association with the number of times of setting a plurality of ball entry permission period information set in the privileged gaming state of 1. Since the specified specified information is stored by the storage means and the payout time is changed by the variable means based on the specified information, the payout time can be changed by a simple process of reading and setting the information stored in the storage means. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load by the variable means can be reduced.

<Characteristic G group> (Sends a signal to stop the supply of balls to the island equipment)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on a specific lottery result by the lottery means, and a ball entering are permitted. The state of the ball entry port set to either the ball entry permission state or the ball entry restriction state in which the ball entry is restricted, and the state of the ball entry port are set to the ball entry state in the privilege game state. A game of a permission setting means for setting a permission state, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects when a ball enters the ball entrance, and the valuable objects paid out by the payout means. The external supply means capable of supplying from the outside of the machine is provided with a supply instruction means for instructing the supply of the valuable object, and the supply instruction means specifies the supply of the valuable object based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that it instructs the external supply means to stop for a period of time.

According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are obtained. That is, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the state is shifted to the privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means based on the result of the specific lottery by the lottery means. In the privilege game state, the state of the ball entrance is set to the ball entry permission state in which the ball is permitted to enter by the permission setting means. When a ball enters the ball entrance, a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out by the payout means, and the valuable objects paid out by the payout means are used as an external supply means that can be supplied from the outside of the gaming machine. On the other hand, the supply of valuable objects is instructed by the supply instruction means. Here, the supply instruction means instructs the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

As a result, it is possible to add inflection to the way valuable objects are paid out during the privileged game state, so that the player can be entertained not only by the amount of valuable objects paid out but also by the way they are paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 includes a condition setting means for setting a trigger condition for instructing the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period by the supply instruction means, and the privilege game The state is configured to have a plurality of ball entry permission periods, which is a period set in the ball entry permission state by the ball entry permission means, and the condition setting means is set in the privileged gaming state of 1. Of the above-mentioned entry permission period, the trigger condition set in the second half of the entry permission period is more likely to be satisfied than the opportunity condition set in the first half of the entry permission period. The gaming machine G2, characterized in that the above-mentioned trigger conditions are set in the above.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the condition setting means sets the trigger condition that triggers the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period. The privilege game state is configured to have a plurality of ball entry permission periods, which is a period set to the ball entry permission state by the ball entry permission means. Of the plurality of ball entry permission periods set in the privilege game state of 1, the trigger condition set in the ball entry permission period set in the latter half is the trigger condition set in the ball entry permission period set in the first half. Trigger conditions are set by the condition setting means so that they are more likely to be established.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period required for the valuable object to be granted in the ball entry permission period set in the latter half, so that the valuable object can be continuously paid out even after the privilege game state ends. it can. Therefore, even after the privileged game state ends, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the privileged game state while the valuable object is being paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, the privileged gaming state is set between the plurality of ball entry permission periods and the plurality of ball entry permission periods, and the state of the ball entry port is set to the ball entry restriction state. A suggestion effect executing means that is configured to have a ball entry restriction period, which is a period, and executes a restriction suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the ball entry restriction period is reached, after the privilege game state ends. A gaming machine G3 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privilege game state is set between the plurality of ball entry permission periods and the plurality of ball entry permission periods, and the ball entry restriction period is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is set to the ball entry restriction state. Is composed of. In addition, after the privileged game state ends, a restriction suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the ball entry restriction period is in effect, is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the privileged gaming state continues even after the privileged gaming state ends. Further, since the valuable object continues to be given even after the privileged gaming state ends, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the valuable object to be given. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the period during which the restriction suggestion effect is being executed and the period during which the ball entry is restricted, so that the player feels that the privileged game state continues longer than it actually is. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the condition setting means stops the supply of the valuable object for a specific period at regular intervals in the ball entry permission period of 1, and in the privileged gaming state of 1. Of the plurality of set ball entry permission periods, the fixed cycle set in the ball entry permission period set in the latter half is the fixed cycle set in the ball entry permission period set in the first half. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the constant cycle is set so as to be shorter than the cycle.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G2 or G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one ball entry permission period, the supply of valuable objects is stopped for a specific period at regular intervals by the condition setting means. Of the plurality of ball entry permission periods set in the privilege game state of 1, the fixed cycle set in the ball entry permission period set in the latter half is the fixed period set in the ball entry permission period set in the first half. A constant cycle is set so that it is shorter than the cycle of.

As a result, the supply of valuable objects is more likely to be stopped as the ball entry permission period is set in the latter half, so that the time required for imparting valuable objects can be lengthened. Therefore, even after the privileged game state ends, the valuable object can be continuously paid out. Therefore, even after the privileged game state ends, the privileged game is played while the valuable object is paid out. You can immerse yourself in the afterglow of the state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G4 includes a storage means for storing specified information defined in association with a plurality of set times of the ball entry permission period set in the privileged gaming state of 1, and the above-mentioned condition. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the setting means is for setting the fixed cycle based on the specified information.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specified information defined in association with the set number of times of the plurality of ball entry permission periods set in one privilege game state in a fixed cycle is stored in the storage means. Then, a constant cycle is set by the condition setting means based on the specified information.

As a result, the condition setting means can set a constant cycle by a simple process of selecting a cycle from the specified information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the condition setting means can be reduced.

<Characteristic H group> (Set a production that spans multiple fluctuations based on the look-ahead result)
An effect executing means for executing an effect, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a lottery means thereof. A privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state that is advantageous for the player when a specific lottery result is obtained, and a ball entrance that gives a predetermined valuable value when the ball enters. As the state of the ball entry port, the opening / closing setting means for setting the pattern of the open state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted in the above-mentioned privilege game state of 1 and the opening / closing setting means thereof. A closing period setting means for setting a closing period, which is a period for setting the state of the ball entrance to the closed state, and a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on a lottery result by the lottery means. A storage means that stores the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and a predetermined lottery that uses the information stored in the storage means before the lottery condition is satisfied. The effect executing means includes a plurality of pre-lottery means for executing the above-mentioned, and the effect executing means includes a dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result when the specific lottery result is obtained by the pre-lottery means. The gaming machine H1 is provided with an effect variable means capable of varying the content of the closed period suggestion effect over the dynamic display of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine H1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. When information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means, and a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the game is played by the privilege game transition means. The state is transferred to a privileged game state that is advantageous to the person. Then, a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entry port, and the state of the ball entry port is an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted. The pattern is set in the privileged game state of 1 by the opening / closing setting means, and the closing period, which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means, is set by the closing period setting means. The dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored until the lottery condition is satisfied by the storage means, and a predetermined lottery is executed in advance by the advance lottery means before the lottery condition is satisfied using the information stored in the storage means. To. Here, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the pre-lottery means, the content of the closing period suggestion effect is displayed over the dynamic display of a plurality of identification information including the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result. It is variable by the effect variable means. As a result, if the effect is changed by the effect variable means, the player can expect the privileged game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes a closed period suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting that the closed period is in a predetermined period after the privileged gaming state ends, and the effect. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the variable means changes the content of the closed period suggestion effect during the execution of the closed period suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a predetermined period after the privileged game state ends, the interim suggestion effect, which is the suggestion effect of the closed period, is executed by the effect execution means. During the execution of the closed period suggestion effect, the content of the calm suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means. As a result, it is possible to make a plurality of privileged game states appear as if they are one privileged game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery means, a period determination means for determining the period until the privileged gaming state is started based on the specific lottery result is provided. In addition, the effect variable means changes the content of the closed period suggestion effect when it is determined by the period determination means that the privileged gaming state is started after the predetermined period is exceeded. The featured gaming machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the advance lottery means, the period until the privilege game state is started is determined by the period determination means based on the specific lottery result. Further, when it is determined by the period determination means that the privilege game state is started after the predetermined period is exceeded, the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means. As a result, when the length of the closing period suggestion effect becomes long, it is possible to recognize that the expectation of the privileged game state is high, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H3, the variable time specification that specifies the time when the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means based on the period until the privileged gaming state determined by the period determination means is started. A gaming machine H4 characterized by providing means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the content of the closing period suggestion effect is changed by the effect variable means based on the period until the multi-privilege gaming state is started, which is determined by the period determining means. Since the time is specified by the variable time specifying means, the execution period of the effect after being changed by the effect variable means can be fixed regardless of the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed and the execution period. There is an effect.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hit types having different numbers of rounds (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).
However, in such a gaming machine, since the player can recognize the number of rounds determined according to the type of hit, the winning game becomes a task of simply digesting the determined number of rounds. In some cases, there was a risk that the player could not enjoy the game that was hit.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is in a state of a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery and a privileged gaming state which is advantageous for the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. Benefits to be transferred Game transition means, a ball entry port that gives a predetermined valuable value when the ball enters, and the state of the ball entry port is limited to the open state in which the ball can enter and the ball entry. An opening / closing setting means for setting the closed state to be performed in the privileged gaming state of 1, and a closing period setting means for setting a closing period which is a period during which the state of the ball entrance is set to the closed state by the opening / closing setting means. , A dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and an execution period setting for setting the execution period for the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. When the execution period setting means executes the dynamic display of the identification information that is the specific lottery result in a predetermined period after the privilege game state ends, the privilege game state is provided. The execution period can be set so that the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the time when a period having the same length as the closing period elapses after the end of.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 includes the suggestion effect executing means for executing the closed period suggestion effect suggesting that the closed period is in the predetermined period in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined period. The execution period having a length equal to or less than the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information set last time in the predetermined period is set.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, the state is shifted to the privileged gaming state which is advantageous for the player by the privileged game transitioning means. .. A predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the ball entry port, and the open state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball entry is restricted are opened and closed as the state of the ball entry port. The privilege game state of 1 is set by the setting means, and the closing period, which is the period during which the state of the ball entrance is closed by the opening / closing setting means, is set by the closing period setting means. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means. Then, when the dynamic display of the identification information that becomes a specific lottery result is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the award game state, a period of the same length as the closed period after the end of the award game state is executed. The execution period is set by the execution period setting means so that the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the time it elapses.
As a result, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period after the privileged gaming state ends, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the privileged gaming state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state has continued for a longer period of time, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a closing period suggestion effect suggesting that the period is closed in a predetermined period is executed by the suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the privileged gaming state has ended for a predetermined period after the privileged gaming state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged game state has continued for a longer period of time, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in a predetermined period. In this case, the execution period of the length equal to or less than the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information set last time is set in the predetermined period, so that the latter half of the predetermined period is the dynamic of the identification information of the shorter execution period. The display is executed. Therefore, since more predetermined lottery is executed in the latter half of the predetermined period, a specific lottery result is obtained within the predetermined period, and when the game shifts to the award gaming state, the latter half of the predetermined period is executed. It will be easier. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the time until the next privileged game state to start to vary, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the privileged game state has ended.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
112 Launch control device (launch means)
65a Specific winning opening (ball entry means )
S212 Discrimination means S213 Bonus game execution means S305 Dynamic display execution means S403, S405 Part of execution period setting means S503, S505 Part of execution period setting means S1203, S1206 Ball entry state setting means S1617 Second effect execution means
S4005 Condition determination means

Claims (2)

A discriminating means that makes a predetermined discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition,
In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result.
A ball entry means that gives a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters, and
As the state of the ball entry means, a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state are set in the above-mentioned privilege game of 1. Sphere state setting means and
The first effect executing means for executing the first effect during the period in which the state of the ball entering means is set to the second state by the ball entering state setting means, and the first effect executing means.
With the completion of the execution of the privileged game, a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the first effect for at least a predetermined period, and a second effect executing means.
A launching means that can launch a game ball based on the operation by the player,
It is different from the second effect based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition that can be satisfied when the content of the operation for the launching means becomes a specific operation content is satisfied during the execution of the second effect. It is equipped with a third effect execution means that also executes the third effect of the effect mode.
The second effect executing means is
Even if the determination condition is not satisfied at the time when the execution of the privilege game is completed, the second effect can be executed.
When the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result during the execution period of the second effect, the second effect can be continued until the specific determination result is shown.
The gaming machine
As an effect mode that can be set during the execution period of the second effect, a first effect mode that can suggest to the player that the privilege game is executed, and the privilege game are executed rather than the first effect mode. At least a second production mode that can suggest that it is difficult is provided.
At least when the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result during the execution period of the second effect, from the start of the privilege game to the setting of the first first state. As the effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of executing a fourth effect capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the first effect. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the launching means is configured to be capable of launching a game ball at a rate of fire according to the content of the operation of the player.

Images